null  null
Industrial Sensing Guide 2012
For machines
that Never Stop!
industrial.omron.eu
Download the latest information
Refer to our website for extended product information with performance charts, dimension drawings,
installation and usage instructions, extended specifications, application examples and find information
on our complete sensing and accessory portfolio.
Content
Tested Reliability from the
world leading manufacturer!
Machine availability is critical to meet the demands expected from today’s
tough production schedules. With the ever increasing cost pressure on
production, even the smallest component failure can cause costly down time.
With this in mind, we design and intensively test our sensors to the highest
standards, to allow you to achieve the highest production performance and
reliability.
• Highest water resistance
2
Overview
Selected industry applications
4
Sensing in material handling & logistics
6
Sensing in food packaging
8
Sensing in the beverage industry
10
Sensing in the pharmaceutical and
healthcare industry
12
Sensing in the automotive parts industry
14
Sensing in the semiconductor, photovoltaic
and electronics industry
• Resistance against temperature change
• Highest mechanical resistance
Special object detection
• Electro-magnetic noise immunity
16
Machine parts/end positions
18
Small/flat objects
20
Transparent objects
22
Objects with structured or shiny surfaces
24
Object detection in harsh environments
Product overview
26
Photoelectric sensors
60
Reflectors and mounting brackets
67
Mark and Colour sensors
75
Lightcurtains and area sensors
80
Fiber optic amplifiers and sensors
109
Accessories for fibers
110
Inductive sensors
130
Limit switches/mechanical sensors
144
Rotary encoders
151
Cable connectors
153
Technical information/product dimensions
176
Index
1
INDUSTRIAL SENSOR SOLUTIONS
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
Material handling
Machine parts/end positions
page 4
page 16
Food packaging
Small / flat objects
page 6
page 18
Beverage
Irregular shapes
page 8
page 72
Pharmaceutical & healthcare
Transparent objects
page 10
page 20
Automotive parts
Structured/shiny surfaces
page 12
page 22
Semiconductor,
photovoltaic & electronics
Colour and print mark
page 14
page 64
Objects in harsh environments
page 24
2
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Position & presence detection
Machine part detection
Area monitoring
Mark & colour detection
Position identification
Inductive sensors
Lightcurtains
Mark detection
Rotary encoders
Sensing distance (Sn) 40mm max
h = 2.1m max
E2
F3
E3ZM-V, E3X-DAC
page 110
page 72
page 64
Limit switches
D4, EE, WL, Z
page 130
Object detection
Photoelectric
sensors
Measuring
Lightcurtains
square: Sn=60m max
cylindrical: Sn=15m max
fork: pitch=25mm max
(cm accuracy) h = 2m max
Colour detection
page 26
page 78
Fiber optic sensors
Area fiber sensors
Sensing distance
20m max
(mm accuracy)
h = 70mm max
E32
E32-Area
page 80
page 77
page 64
µm accuracy
high end colour vision
Profile
E6
F3EM
Measurement
Displacement/distance
Rotation frequency
10.000 rpm max
6 - 3600 pulses/rotation
E3X CLR
FQ CLR
page 144
Inspection & ident systems
Position/diameter/width
Vision systems
Ident systems
ZX-GT
µm
µm
µm
For more information refer to QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION GUIDE
3
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN MATERIAL HANDLING & LOGISTICS
For distribution systems that Never Stop
A smooth and disturbance free operation is key for today’s distribution systems.
• Avoid malfunctions due to changing ambient light or reflective backgrounds
• Minimize re-adjustment and maintenance effort during operation
INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Ensure fast installation and avoid time consuming re-adjustments
• Fast click-mounting of the E3FZ and E3Z photoelectric sensors
• High accuracy of E3Z/E3F optical systems for fast and
simple alignment
ENVIRONMENTAL INFLUENCES
Avoid disturbances from artificial light sources and electromagnetic noise e.g. from inverters
• Pulse synchronisation for ambient light immunity
• Intensive shielding for high EMC
More on photoelectric sensors E3Z, E3FZ and E3F2
page 26
4
More on resistance to environmental influences page 24
OPERATION
BACKGROUNDS AND SHINY OBJECTS
Minimize the influence from shiny objects and backgrounds
• Reliable background suppression on diffuse-reflective models
• Mirror surface rejection (M.S.R.) on retro-reflective models
More on background suppression models of E3Z family page 29
Ensure continuous operation and avoid costly machine downtime
• High power LED to compensate for dirt and misalignment
• Rugged housing for protection against mechanical damage
More on E3Z and E3F page 29
5
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN FOOD PACKAGING
Reliable sensing for flexible machines
Enhanced hygiene and an increasing variety of packaging materials and shapes require
easy-to-clean yet flexible packaging machine designs. A high re-usability in design and
maximum efficiency during production is key to ensure a competitive food production.
• High detergent resistance for longer lifetime
• Platform concept for enhanced flexibility
• Proven reliability
PACKAGING MATERIAL VARIETY
Food products are filled into a large variety of packaging materials.
Transparent materials, uneven or shiny surfaces result in the usage
of many special sensors in filling and wrapping machines.
• Simplify your machine design: one platform – one usage concept –
one mounting
• Choose the performance you need
E3Z platform – reliability, simplicity and variety
E3X platform – for smallest spaces and flexible mounting
More on the detection of different materials page 20 to 23
6
More on mark and colour sensors page 64
DETECTING DIFFERENT PACKAGED OBJECTS
HYGIENE AND FREQUENT CLEANING
Not only the packaging material but also the food comes in different
shapes and sizes. Finding the best solution to reliably detect the
packaged food is a combination of sensor type, application, mounting
and environmental conditions.
Frequent cleaning with harsh detergents and high water pressure
significantly reduces the lifetime of machine components. To avoid
machine downtime during the processing of fresh food, sensors are
frequently replaced resulting in high maintenance cost.
• Best practice solutions
• Enhanced sensor lifetime with stainless steel and fluororesin
• Application solution support
sensors lasting up to 20 times longer than conventional sensors
• SUS 316L or fluororesin and smooth housing design for enhanced
hygiene
More on the detection of differently shaped objects page 72
More on detergent resistant sensors see page 24
For stainless steel safety non-contact switches refer to
MACHINE SAFETY GUIDE
7
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN THE BEVERAGE INDUSTRY
For flexible and hygienic machines that Never Stop
For beverages and household liquids the shapes and sizes of containers – especially of PET bottles –
are very diverse.
In spite of this diversity the common aspects to beverage filling are observing the high hygienic
requirements, ensuring that containers are perfectly closed and appealing to customers and that the
production can be realised with high cost efficiency.
REDUCED DIVERSITY - FITTING PERFORMANCE
Reduce the variety of housings and usage concepts for the
detection of transparent materials, labels, cartons or foils.
• Standardised sensor platforms for common and special operation
models in one housing
• E3Z platform for highest reliability and accuracy for standard tasks
• E3X platform for enhanced detection, processing and communication
functionality
• Vision and Measurement platform for advanced inspection solutions
More on E3Z platform page 26, more on E3X platform page 80
More on Inspection solutions in QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION GUIDE
8
HYGIENE AND FREQUENT CLEANING
ENHANCED DETECTION STABILITY
Increased sensor life expectancy in regularly cleaned environments.
Enhance the stability of the detection of transparent bottles or film
compensating for the influence of ambient light, dust, LED aging or
temperature.
• Ecolab certified high detergent resistance for increased lifetime
• New production process for affordable SUS316L housings
• Fluororesin housing for highest detergent resistance and smooth
• Autocompensation functions for enhanced detection stability
housing
More on sensors for harsh environments page 24
More on detection of transparent objects page 20
9
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN THE PHARMACEUTICAL & HEALTHCARE INDUSTRY
Reliability, precision and ease-of-use in operation and machine design
The high quality consciousness in the pharmaceutical industry results in demanding requirements for sensors in terms of
precision, repeatability, performance and durability even in the harshest environments. Documentation requirements and
obtaining approvals for machines can be time consuming and proven solutions fulfilling these demanding requirements are
preferred.
• Proven solutions with E3Z and E3X photoelectric sensors in a wide range of pharmaceutical
filling and packaging machines
• Reliability and precision for long term stability avoiding time consuming re-adjustments
• E3Z and E3X platform concept reducing the effort to adapt machine designs to special customer
requests or different industry requirements
STERILISATION & ASEPTIC FILLING
QUALITY INSPECTION MADE EASY
The reduction of organic pyrogens like bacteria, viruses or fungi
are key to ensure a sterile production. The use of very high
temperatures up to 400°C or aggressive chemicals like H²O²
can significantly reduce the lifetime of sensors in these areas.
In order to realize a failure free production the detection of product
deviations is required. Verifying the presence of needles, protective
covers or ensuring the correct glass colour of vials requires precise
and repeatable sensing performance.
• Temperature and chemical resistant fiber heads for long sensor
• Easy-to-use and precise twin output fiber solutions simplifying
the detection of challenging objects and small deviations
(detection of two light levels)
• Easy-to-use vision sensors, vision systems and inspection
solutions for multi-inspection tasks
lifetime
• Dual state detection fiber amplifier for the reduction of sensor
heads in critical production areas
More on sensors for harsh environments page 24
10
More on E3X fiber optic sensors page 80
More on vision sensors and systems
in QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION GUIDE
FLEXIBILITY WITH PROVEN SOLUTIONS
Reducing the effort to adapt machines to special customer
or market demands, requires a flexible machine design.
A standardized mounting concept simplifies the adaption of the
sensor performance to specific application and environmental
requirements.
• E3Z platform with a wide range of plastic or stainless steel
sensors for standard or special tasks
• E3X fiber platform for high performance sensing, harshest
environments and smallest spaces
CONFORMANCE & BEST PRACTICE SOLUTIONS
Documentation requirements and obtaining approvals for packaging
machines in pharmaceutical applications can be time consuming.
Re-using proven solutions enhances the acceptance both from legal
bodies and pharma producers.
• Close co-operation with leading machine builders and pharma
producers to establish best practice solutions
More on E3Z photoelectric sensors page 26
More on E3X fiber optic sensors page 80
11
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN THE AUTOMOTIVE PARTS INDUSTRY
Zero defect production
Producing high quality parts to order for the automotive industry requires highest precision and
machine availability during production. Error-free identification and inspection assures that all
parts are within tolerance requirements.
MACHINE AVAILABILITY
Avoid malfunctions due to changing ambient light, dust or
sensor misalignment.
• Pulse synchronisation for reliable ambient light immunity
• Precision optical alignment and high visibility LEDs
compensating for dirt and misalignment
HARSH ENVIROMENTS
Enhance sensor lifetime and detection reliability in environments
with aggressive lubricants or metal chips.
• Tested resistance against oil, welding spatters and mechanical
damage
More on E3Z platform page 26, more on E3X platform
page 80
12
More on sensors for harsh environments page 24
IDENTIFICATION – PRODUCE TO ORDER
Ensure that products are correctly identified before shipping.
INSPECTION – QUALITY CONTROL
Verify the presence of product details and ensure that product
dimensions are within tolerances.
• Colour identification with colour (RGB) ratio comparison sensor
• Advanced colour and shape identification with full colour vision
sensors
• Part identification with 2D (datamatrix) code reading
• High precision laser and inductive sensors for detail presence
verification
• High precision measurement systems for dimension tolerance
verification
More on E3C Laser page 46, on E2C-EDA inductive page 129
More on measurement systems in QUALITY CONTROL &
INSPECTION GUIDE
More on colour detection page 64
More on 2D code readers in QUALITY CONTROL &
INSPECTION GUIDE
13
SELECTED INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
SENSING IN THE SEMICONDUCTOR, PHOTOVOLTAIC &
ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY
For small, fast and flexible machines
Continuous miniaturisation and higher performance of electronic components and the ever increasing pressure to
increase productivity, result in the demand for small sized, specialised sensors with highest value-performance ratio.
• Wide portfolio of sensors optimized for dedicated applications
• Choose the platform performance you need:
EE Photomicrosensors – best value performance ratio and simple mounting for object and machine part detection
E32 Fiber Optics – highest performance in small size for dedicated applications and harsh environments
HARSH ENVIRONMENTS
DYNAMIC HANDLING
The front end processes involve aggressive chemicals and in some
cases high temperatures or very low air pressure (vacuum).
The dynamic handling of wafers with highly reflective surfaces requires
small, flexible and accurate sensors.
• Long sensor lifetime with high chemical, vacuum and temperature
• High accuracy wafer mapping fibers and limited reflective fibers for
resistance
More on special environment fibers page 24
14
stable detection of wafers
More on fiber sensors page 80.
More on the detection of shiny objects page 22.
GLASS POSITIONING AND DETECTION
To handle and stack flat glass plates without breakage requires
precise detection and positioning. The transparency of the
material, the reflections on the surface and the influence of water
drops provide a challenge to standard sensors.
• High precision digital laser sensors for most accurate detection
over longer distances
• Special fiber sensors optimised for flat glass detection even in
wet processes
More on glass detection fiber heads page 97
More on E3C long range laser sensor page 46
PRECISION
Chip sizes and assembly machines are continuously becoming smaller.
• Detection of smallest objects (100 μm) with precision fiber heads
• Easy to mount photomicrosensors for the detection of moving machine
parts or linear motors
More on EE photomicrosensors page 58
More on E32 precision detection fiber heads page 95
15
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
DETECTION OF MACHINE PARTS / END POSITIONS
The reliable and flexible way to stop your machines
For machine part movement detection and for the prevention of machine damage or operator injuries
caused by moving machine parts, limit switches are often used.
As a leading global manufacturer for limit switches, Omron provides a large variety of different models
fitting varying usage and application requirements.
• Wide range of mechanical actuators or contactless models for varying usage preferences
• Different housing and mounting shapes for regional and usage preferences
• Performance level fitting your application requirements:
• Best choice in value for money with basic protection for subassemblies
• High environmental protection and tested long operational lifetime models
• Best choice for dedicated applications
MECHANICAL DETECTION
CONTACTLESS DETECTION
For the detection of machine part end positions, mechanical
sensors provide an intuitive and easy to install solution and
even high current consumption loads can be switched
directly. The high immunity to changing environmental
influences ensures a reliable operation in all enviroments.
Mechanical detection can influence the position of smaller
objects or damage the surface. For metallic machine parts
inductive sensors provide a reliable contactless detection
with similar high immunity to most environmental influences.
For contactless detection in enclosed machine compartments, the miniature optical photomicrosensors provide very
accurate positioning for all materials at best value for money.
• Direct load switching
• Intuitive installation
• Photomicrosensors for all materials in uncritical
environments
• Inductive sensors for metallic machine parts with high
environmental resistance
For D4 and Z limit switches see page 130
16
For EE-SX photomicrosensors see page 58
For E2 inductive sensors see page 110
limit
ENSURING MACHINE SAFETY
To prevent operator injuries from moving machine parts, safety
limit switches are often used.
• Mounting compatibility for safe and non-safety applications
• Wide range of safe limit switches, door switches, hinge
switches and non-contact switches
size
shape
transparent
shiny
colour
environment
SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTS OR
REQUIREMENTS
For extended temperature ranges, special performance
requirements, special mounting shapes (e.g. popular shapes
in countries around the world) or a wide range of actuators,
Omron provides one of the most comprehensive portfolios.
mm
400°C
mA
A
μm
-40°C
For safe control systems and safety limit
switches see Machine Safety Guide
For an overview of special models see page 130
17
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
DETECTION OF FLAT OBJECTS
Similar tasks – several solutions
For photoelectric sensors flat objects are often difficult to distinguish from the surface they are lying on.
Varying colours of the object or the background can provide a further challenge to standard photoelectric
sensors and often require special solutions.
• Simplify your machine design: one platform – one usage concept – one mounting
• Choose the performance you need:
E3Z platform – reliability, simplicity and variety
Remote amplifier platform – for precise detection when mounting space is limited
INSTALLATION BETWEEN CONVEYOR
SEGMENTS
For detecting flat objects on a conveyor system, it is possible
to install the sensors to look through the gaps between the
conveyor segments. This enables detection of products with
a very small profile, although this solution is not always
mechanically possible.
SEVERAL MM THICKNESS
For the detection of flat objects a small and focused beam
can be required. To reliably distinguish between the background and the object when detecting from above, the
influence of colour and surface finish need to be minimized.
• Focused and thin beam of the E3Z LASER
• Small black / white error of background suppression
• Best value performance ratio with E3Z platform
• Flexible mounting in small spaces with E3X platform
model E3Z-LL
• Infrared light E3Z models for applications with small
contrast between object and background when using
standard red light
For E3Z photoelectric sensors page 26
For E3X remote amplifier platform page 80
18
For E3Z Laser page 31
limit
DOWN TO 100 µM THICKNESS
size
shape
transparent
shiny
colour
environment
SMALL HEIGHT DIFFERENCES IN
METAL OBJECTS
For the detection of very small objects or height differences
a precise optical and mechanical solution is required. The
detection of miniature height differences is often combined
with mounting in small spaces.
On shiny metallic surfaces or in dirty environments teachable
high precision inductive sensors can be used for the detection
of height differences of several 100 μm.
• Precise triangulation fiber heads for the detection of small
• High repeat accuracy of the E2C high performance
height differences (e.g. labels) with limited mounting space
• Coaxial optics of the high performance fiber optic sensor
E32-EC41 for the detection of smallest diameters (100 μm)
For E32 precise detection fiber heads page 95.
For even higher precision see measurement platform
in QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION GUIDE
inductive sensor heads
For E2C inductive sensor heads see page 129, for higher
precision see ZX-E in QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION
GUIDE
19
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
TRANSPARENT OBJECTS
Performance optimised for your application
Transparent objects are usually produced with the goal to provide best visibility of the products they contain.
This makes these objects also difficult to detect with optical sensing principles. But photoelectric sensors
are still the preferred choice for the detection of transparent objects. Depending on the object characteristics,
the variety of the objects that need to be detected and the environmental conditions, different solutions may
be required. Omron's platform concept provides flexibility to easily adapt the sensing performance level to
the required task.
• Simplify your machine design: one platform – one usage concept – one housing
• Choose the performance your need:
• Best choice for standard transparent objects and environments
• Best choice in reliability, flexibility and stability for standard and challenging environments
• Best performance for dedicated applications
STANDARD TRANSPARENT BOTTLE
DETECTION
ENHANCED DETECTION RELIABILITY
FOR PET BOTTLES
For standard glass or PET bottle detection, retro-reflective
solutions with high sensitivity adjustment provide a stable
detection as the beam goes through the bottle twice reducing
the emitted light. Alternatively a wide beam diffuse-reflective
sensor can be used detecting the diffuse reflected light from
a large area of the bottle.
Using the polarizing effect of PET bottles, a higher signal
margin can be achieved. In combination with compensating
for the LED output power to keep the amount of received light
stable, the detection stability for PET bottles can be enhanced
even in changing conditions.
• P-opaquing function for higher signal margin
• Stable detection for standard objects and environments
• Auto power compensation for enhanced detection stability
• Easy mounting and simple sensitivity adjustment
More on E3Z-B, E3FZ-B, E3ZM-B transparent object
sensors page 26
20
More on E3ZM-B PET optimised models page 37
limit
HIGHEST ACCURACY FOR
TRANSPARENT MEDIA
For the precise positioning or detection over longer distances
or very challenging objects, full control over the sender beam
and signal evaluation is required.
• High precision Laser sensors for accurate and stable
size
shape
transparent
shiny
colour
environment
MOUNTING FLEXIBILITY
The space and mounting conditions for the detection of
transparent objects at different points in the production
process may vary significantly. With the remote fiber amplifier
platform the setting and adjustment of the sensor is always
the same while the fiber sensing head is selected according
to application and mounting requirements.
detections over longer distances
• Auto-compensation function for long term detection stability
• Enhanced design flexibility
• One platform – one usage concept
More on E3C-LDA page 46
More on E3X-DA-S page 104
More on E32 glass detection fiber sensors see page 97
21
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
OBJECTS WITH STRUCTURED OR SHINY SURFACES
Similar tasks – several solutions
Objects with very reflective or structured surfaces can cause unpredictable reflections.
This may influence the stable detection of the objects with photoelectric sensors.
In order to realize the stable detection of these objects, several solutions are possible
depending on the object and the mounting conditions.
THROUGH BEAM SENSORS AND RETROREFLECTIVE SOLUTIONS WITH MSR
DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE WITH
BACKGROUND SUPPRESSION
Using a through-beam sensor with a separate sender and
receiver is the most reliable solution as the object blocks the
emitted light independent of colour or surface.
For applications where a separate receiver or a reflector cannot
be mounted, different solutions with diffuse reflective sensors
with background suppression, wide beams, etc. can be used.
Additional constructive measures like mounting at an angle can
enhance the detection stability.
Retro-reflective sensors work on the same principle but direct
reflections from shiny surfaces acting like a reflector need to
be compensated for by the mirror surface rejection (M.S.R.)
function.
• Background suppression sensors with small black /white
error for stable detection independent of colour or background
• Wide beam models for stable detection independent of indents
and direct reflections
More information on MSR in technical section page 155
22
For application specific solutions please contact
your Omron sales representative
limit
size
shape
transparent
shiny
colour
environment
LIMITED REFLECTIVE
ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGIES
The total reflections on flat objects with very shiny surfaces
provide a challenge for standard diffuse reflective models.
Limited reflective sensors utilize this effect to provide a
stable detection independent of the surface colour.
The effects of shiny and structured objects can be overcome
with the usage of alternative technologies like inductive
sensors or vision sensors.
• Accurate positioning and detection of flat high-reflectivity
• Stable detection of metal objects independent of object
objects
surface with inductive sensors
• Stable detection of non-metal objects with
tactile/mechanical or capacitive sensors
• Object detection by pattern recognition and inspection at
the same time with vision sensors
More on limited reflective fiber sensors page 95
More on inductive and capacitive sensors page 110
More on tactile sensors page 130
More on vision sensors in QUALITY CONTROL &
INSPECTION GUIDE
23
SPECIAL OBJECT DETECTION
OBJECT DETECTION IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS
Enhanced resistance for a longer lifetime
Environmental influences like high temperatures, chemicals, water or electromagnetic noise can reduce the lifetime
of sensors or influence the stable operation. For highest reliability and long lifetime, each Omron sensor is designed
and tested to withstand conditions exceeding legal requirements and standard industrial environmental conditions.
For details about individual tests please contact your Omron representative.
HIGH RESISTANCE TESTS FOR STANDARD SENSORS
• Water resistance (details see technical section)
Water, oil and chemical resistance
• Salt spray resistance
• Oil resistance
Temperature resistance
• High / low continuous temperatures
• Temperature shock (hot/cold air and water)
• Inverter noise
Electromagnetic noise immunity
• Mobile communication equipment
• Electrical circuit disturbances
• Electrostatic discharge
Mechanical resistance
• Vibration
• Shock (hammering)
Ambient light immunity/mutual interference prevention
Protective circuits
24
limit
size
shape
transparent
shiny
colour
environment
ENHANCED RESISTANCE SPECIAL TYPES
E2E
E2FM
E3ZM-C
page 126
page 127
page 35
E2FQ
E2EH
E3ZM
E3F2-_-S
E32 Chem. resist.
page 124
page 123
page 33
page 53
page 89
E2EH
E32 Heat resist.
TZ, WL-_-TH
page 123
page 90
page 120
Enhanced oil resistance
Enhanced chemical/
detergent resistance
High temperature
E2AU
Certified higher EMC
resistance
page 125
E2FM
Enhanced mechanical
resistance
page 127
E32 Vac. resist.
Vacuum resistance
page 92
25
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS
For machines that Never Stop
Omron’s photoelectric sensor range is designed and tested to achieve the maximum levels of
reliability and detection performance. Utilising the latest sensor technology, our sensors ensure
your machines Never Stop.
Through-beam
30 m
Retroreflective (with MSR)
5m
Compact square plastic housing
Diffuse-reflective
E3Z
1m
see page 29
• Highest water resistance
• Highest electromagnetic noise immunity
Distance-settable with background suppression
(e.g. from inverters)
• Pulse synchronisation for reliable ambient
light immunity
200 mm
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Precision
positioning
and detection
E3Z Laser
Small visible
light spot
see page 31
26
Detergent
resistant
E3ZM
Oil resistant
E3ZM-C
Print mark
detection
E3ZM-V
Detergent
resistant
stainless steel
housing
Oil resistant
stainless steel
housing
Autoteach
and white LED
see page 33
see page 35
see page 67
Transparent
material
detection
E3ZM-B
Transparent
material
detection
E3Z-B
Transparent
material
detection
E3FZ-B
General transparent materials
or PET optimised
models
General transparent materials
optimised
optical system
General transparent material
optimised optical
system
see page 37
see page 32
see page 52
E3H2
M12, M8
E3T-C
M6, M5
E32 fiber optics
dia 500 µm to M6
see page 38
see page 54
see page 55
see page 80
E3Z-G
25 mm
EE-SPX_03
13 mm
EE-SX
5 mm
see page 56
see page 57
see page 59
E3FZ
E3F2
E3F2-_41
see page 50
see page 48
see page 49
E3G
E3S-CL
see page 41
see page 40
1
miniature housing:
Photoelectric sensors
E3T
fork shape:
cylindrical M18 housing:
longer distance:
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Detergent
resistant
Structured
object detection
Multi voltage power supply
E3F2-_-S
E3JK
Detergent
resistant stainless
steel housing
• 12-240VDC and
24-240VAC
• Relay output
see page 53
see page 42
E3JM
models with
timer function
see page 43
E3G-M
long distance
and models with
timer function
see page 44
E3S-LS3
Wide beam
see page 45
High precision
detection
E3C-LDA
Up to 10 μm
accuracy
see page 46
27
28
E3Z
General purpose sensor in compact
plastic housing
The compact housing size and the high-power LED provide an excellent performance-size ratio and the high optical precision and long sensor lifetime make the
sensor the first choice for standard and challenging applications.
Minimal optical axis deviation for easy alignment
IP67 and IP69K for highest water resistance
Intensive shielding for highest noise immunity (EMC)
Multiple molding housing for high mechanical resistance
1
•
•
•
•
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensing distance
Through-beam
10 m
(Red light)
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
Diffuse-reflective wide
beam
Distance
settable
(background
suppression)
Small
spot
(Red
light)
Standard
(Red
light)
0.1 to 4 m
(Red light)
*2
0.1 to 5 m*2
(Infrared light)
1 m (adjustable) (Infrared light)
100 mm (adjustable) (Infrared light)
2 mm
80 mm
20 mm
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
BGS (set to minimum)
BGS (set to maximum)
20 mm
BGS (at min. setting)
40 mm
200 mm
BGS (at max. setting)
Incident
light level
threshold (fixed)
FGS (at min. setting)
FGS (at max. setting)
*1
*2
*3
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
30 m
(Infrared light)
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Compact
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of cable types with:
- M1J: M12 with 30 cm cable
- M3J: M8 4-pin with 30 cm cable
- M5J: M8 3-pin with 30 cm cable
Sensor type
M18 cylindrical
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-T62 2M
E3Z-T82 2M
E3Z-T67
E3Z-T87
E3Z-T61A 2M
E3Z-T81A 2M
E3Z-T66A
E3Z-T86A
E3Z-R61 2M
E3Z-R81 2M
E3Z-R66
E3Z-R86
E3Z-R61-4 2M
E3Z-R81-4 2M
E3Z-R66-4
E3Z-R86-4
E3Z-D62 2M
E3Z-D82 2M
E3Z-D67
E3Z-D87
E3Z-D61 2M
E3Z-D81 2M
E3Z-D66
E3Z-D86
E3Z-LS63 2M
E3Z-LS83 2M
E3Z-LS68
E3Z-LS88
E3Z-LS61 2M*3
E3Z-LS81 2M*3
E3Z-LS66*3
E3Z-LS86*3
Light-ON/Dark-ON switch selectable
Measured with E39-R1S
For infrared LED models contact your Omron representative
For higher precision and
longer distance see E3Z-Laser
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
More about the usage in
conveying see page 4
Mounting brackets and
reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Material handling
Accessories
29
E3Z
Photoelectric sensors
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R
Diffuse-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
(wide beam)
Red LED
Infrared LED
Standard
Small spot
NPN
E3Z-T62/T67
E3Z-T61A/T66A
E3Z-R61/R66
E3Z-R6_-4
E3Z-D62/D67
E3Z-D61/D66
E3Z-LS61/66
E3Z-LS63/68
PNP
E3Z-T82/T87
E3Z-T81A/T86A
E3Z-R81/R86
E3Z-R8_-4
E3Z-D82/D87
E3Z-D81/D86
E3Z-LS81/86
E3Z-LS83/88
10% of set
distance max.
5% of set
distance max.
Red LED
(680 nm)
Red LED
(650 nm)
Directional angle
Both emitter and receiver:
3° to 15°
Black/white error
–
Light source
(wave length)
Infrared LED (870 RED LED
nm)
(700 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity
protection, shortcircuit protection,
output reverse polarity protection
Output shortcircuit protection,
power supply,
reverse polarity
protection
Response time
2 ms max.
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-25 to 55°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Denatured polyacrylate resin
2° to 10°
Red LED
(680 nm)
–
Infrared LED (870 Infrared LED (860 nm)
nm)
Reverse polarity protection,
output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention,
output reverse polarity protection
Reverse polarity protection,
output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention
-40 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
High ambient light immunity
Methacrylate resin
High electromagnetic noise immunity
Denatured polyacrylate resin
Robust and tight housing construction
For higher precision and
longer distance see E3Z-Laser
General purpose
30
Distance-settable (background
suppression)
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
More about the usage in
conveying see page 4
Mounting brackets and
reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Material handling
Accessories
E3Z-Laser
LASER sensor in compact plastic housing
The E3Z LASER sensor in compact plastic housing features visible LASER light for
precision positioning and detection applications.
Visible LASER light for precision positioning and small object detection
High power LD for long range precision
Class 1 LASER
Precise background suppression and low black/white error for accurate detection
1
•
•
•
•
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensing distance
Through-beam
60 m
1 ms
Distance-settable
(background suppression)
20 to 300 mm
25 to 300 mm
0.5 ms
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
0.3 to 15 m*2
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
*1
*2
Response
time
Compact
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M'
of cable types with:
- M1J: M12 with 30 cm cable
- M3J: M8 4-pin with 30 cm cable
- M5J: M8 3-pin with 30 cm cable
Sensor type
M18 cylindrical
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-LT61 2M
E3Z-LT81 2M
E3Z-LT66
E3Z-LT86
E3Z-LR61 2M
E3Z-LR81 2M
E3Z-LR66
E3Z-LR86
E3Z-LL61 2M
E3Z-LL81 2M
E3Z-LL66
E3Z-LL86
E3Z-LL63 2M
E3Z-LL83 2M
E3Z-LL68
E3Z-LL88
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Measured with E39-R1
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Distance settable (background suppression)
Standard model
High-speed model
NPN output
E3Z-LT61/-LT66
E3Z-LR61/-LR66
E3Z-LL61/-LL66
E3Z-LL63/-LL68
PNP output
E3Z-LT81/-LT86
E3Z-LR81/-LR86
E3Z-LL81/-LL86
E3Z-LL83/-LL88
5% (at 160 mm)
5% (at 100 mm)
Black/white error
–
Light source (wave length)
Red LD (655 nm), JIS Class 1, IEC Class 1, FDA Class II
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polari- Power supply reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection,
ty, protection, short circuit mutual interference prevention
protection, output reverse
polarity protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient temperature Operating
-10 to 55°C
Storage
Degree of protection
Material
0.5 ms max.
-25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Modified polyacrylate resin
Methacrylate
Modified polyacrylate resin
Class 1 laser
For more info on the detection
of small objects see page 18
For higher precision
detection see E3C
General purpose
Low black/white error for precise detection
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Visible laser light for precision positioning
Semiconductor
Material handling
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Accessories
31
E3Z-B
Photoelectric sensors
Transparent object detection photoelectric
sensor in compact plastic housing
The E3Z-B provides easy adjustment for the detection of a large variety of standard
transparent objects.
• Detects a wide range of bottles from single bottles to sets of stocked bottles
• IP67/IP69K tested for highest water resistance
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
0.5 to 2 m*2 (adjustable)
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
Retro-reflective without M.S.R. 80 to 500 mm*2 (adjustable)
*1
*2
M18 cylindrical
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–
E3Z-B61 2M
E3Z-B81 2M

–
–
–
E3Z-B66
E3Z-B86
–
–
2m
–
E3Z-B62 2M
E3Z-B82 2M

–
–
–
E3Z-B67
E3Z-B87
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Measured with E39-R1S
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective without M.S.R.
NPN output
E3Z-B61/E3Z-B66
E3Z-B62/E3Z-B67
PNP output
E3Z-B81/E3Z-B86
E3Z-B82/E3Z-B87
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (680 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) : 10% max.
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25C to 55C
Storage
-40C to 70C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Methacrylate resin
Easy adjustment for the detection of a large
variety of transparent objects
For SUS housing or enhanced
stability on PET see E3ZM-B
General purpose
32
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3ZM
Photoelectric sensor in compact
stainless steel housing
Compact housing size and high power LED for excellent performance-size ratio in a
rugged, detergent-resistant stainless steel housing for demanding environments.
1
• High grade stainless steel housing (SUS316L)
• IP67 and IP69k for highest water resistance
• ECOLAB tested and certified detergent resistance
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
Compact
0.8 m with built-in slit
0.1 to 4 m
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
15 m
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
M18 cylindrical
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–
2m

–
–
NPN output
PNP output
E3ZM-T61 2M
E3ZM-T81 2M
E3ZM-T66
E3ZM-T86
E3ZM-T63 2M
E3ZM-T83 2M
E3ZM-T68
E3ZM-T88
E3ZM-R61 2M
E3ZM-R81 2M
E3ZM-R66
E3ZM-R86
E3ZM-D62 2M
E3ZM-D82 2M
*2
Diffuse-reflective
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
10 to 100 mm (fixed)
–
–
2m

–
–
–
–

10 to 200 mm (fixed)
–
–
–

–
2m
–
2m
–
E3ZM-D67
E3ZM-D87
E3ZM-LS61X 2M
E3ZM-LS66X
*3
E3ZM-LS64X 2M
E3ZM-LS69X
*3
E3ZM-LS81X 2M*3
E3ZM-LS86X*3
*3
*3
E3ZM-LS84X 2M*3
E3ZM-LS89X*3
*1
*2
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable except for E3ZM-LS
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of the cable types with:
- S1J: for M12 stainless steel plug with 30 cm cable
- S3J: for M8 4-pin stainless steel plug with 30cm cable
- S5J: for M8 3-pin stainless steel plug with 30cm cable (except for background suppression types)
- M1J: for M12 brass plug with 30cm cable
- M3J: for M8 4-pin brass plug with 30cm cable
- M5J: for M8 3-pin brass plug with 30cm cable (except for background suppression types)
*3
E3ZM-LS_X are fixed LIGHT-ON models. For fixed DARK-ON models please order E3ZM-LS_Y and for L-ON/D-ON selectable by wire please order E3ZM-LS_H.
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
Through-beam
E3ZM-T61
E3ZM-T66
E3ZM-T63
E3ZM-T68
E3ZM-R61
E3ZM-R66
E3ZM-D62
E3ZM-D67
PNP
E3ZM-T81
E3ZM-T86
E3ZM-T83
E3ZM-T88
E3ZM-R81
E3ZM-R86
E3ZM-D82
E3ZM-D87
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, ±10% ripple (p-p)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short- Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention,
circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection output reverse polarity protection
Response time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating -25°C to 55°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Methacrylic resin
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Sensitivity
PEEK (polyether ether ketone)
adjustment
and operation switch
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Detergent resistant reflectors
page 60 and
cable connectors page 151
More SUS316L models
see page 24
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
33
E3ZM
Photoelectric sensors
Item
Diffuse-reflective with background suppression (fixed distance)
NPN
E3ZM-LS61X
E3ZM-LS66X
E3ZM-LS64X
E3ZM-LS69X
PNP
E3ZM-LS81X
E3ZM-LS86X
E3ZM-LS84X
E3ZM-LS89X
Light source (adjustable)
Red LED (650 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Black/white error
5% of sensing distance max.
20% of sensing distance max.
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, ±10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference protection
Response time
Ambient
temperature range
1 ms max.
Operating -25°C to 55°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
Methacrylic resin
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Sensitivity
adjustment and
operation switch
PEEK (polyether ether ketone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Robust construction
Tight housing
Detergent resistant
Pre-wired models with stainless steel plug connectors for best combination of highest water
ingress protection with fast connect & disconnect..
Detergent resistant reflectors
page 60 and
cable connectors page 151
More SUS316L models
see page 24
General purpose
34
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3ZM-C
Oil-resistant photoelectric sensor in compact
stainless steel housing
The oil-resistant compact photoelectric sensor in a robust stainless steel housing
features an enhanced functional reserve for reliable object detection in dirty and
mechanically demanding environments such as automotive assembly lines.
1
• Oil-resistant stainless steel housing
• IP67 and IP69k for highest water resistance
• High visibility orange LED in through-beam model for easy alignment
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
20 m
(Orange light)
Diffuse-reflective
0.1 to 4m*3
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
10 to 100 mm (fixed)
10 to 200 mm (fixed)
*1
*2
*3
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
15 m
(Infrared light)
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
M18 cylindrical
NPN output
PNP output
E3ZM-CT61 2M
E3ZM-CT81 2M
E3ZM-CT61-M1TJ
E3ZM-CT81-M1TJ
–
–
2m
–
–
–
–
*2

–
–
–
E3ZM-CT66
E3ZM-CT86
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-CT62B 2M
E3ZM-CT82B 2M
–
–
–
*2
E3ZM-CT62B-M1TJ
E3ZM-CT82B-M1TJ

–
–
–
E3ZM-CT67B
E3ZM-CT87B
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-CR61 2M
E3ZM-CR81 2M
–
–
–
*2
E3ZM-CR61-M1TJ
E3ZM-CR81-M1TJ

–
–
–
E3ZM-CR66
E3ZM-CR86
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-CD62 2M
E3ZM-CD82 2M
–
–
–
*2
E3ZM-CD62-M1TJ
E3ZM-CD82-M1TJ

–
–
–
E3ZM-CD67
E3ZM-CD87
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-CL61H 2M
E3ZM-CL81H 2M
–
–
–
*2
E3ZM-CL61H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL81H-M1TJ

–
–
–
E3ZM-CL66H
E3ZM-CL86H
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-CL64H 2M
E3ZM-CL84H 2M
–
–
–
*2
E3ZM-CL64H-M1TJ
E3ZM-CL84H-M1TJ

–
–
–
E3ZM-CL69H
E3ZM-CL89H
Light-ON/ Dark-ON switch selectable for E3ZM-CT, E3ZM-CR and E3ZM-CD. Light-ON/ Dark-ON selectable by wire for E3ZM-CL.
uses OMRON's Twist & Click M12 connector XS5.
Measured with E39-R1S.
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
NPN
Through-beam
E3ZM-CT61 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT66
E3ZM-CT62B (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT67B
E3ZM-CR61 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CR66
E3ZM-CD62 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CD67
PNP
E3ZM-CT81 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT86
E3ZM-CT82B (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CT87B
E3ZM-CR81 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CR86
E3ZM-CD82 (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CD87
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Orange LED (615 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, including 10% ripple (p-p)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short- Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection,
circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection and mutual interference prevention
Response time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
2 ms max.
1 ms max.
Operating -25°C to 55°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Sensitivity
adjustment and
operation switch
PEEK (polyether ether ketone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
More oil resistant models see
page 24
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
For M12 and Twist&Click
connectors see page 151.
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
35
E3ZM-C
Photoelectric sensors
Item
Diffuse-reflective with background suppression (fixed distance)
NPN
E3ZM-CL61H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL66H
E3ZM-CL64H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL69H
PNP
E3ZM-CL81H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL86H
E3ZM-CL84H (-M1TJ)
E3ZM-CL89H
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (650 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, ±10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, reversed output polarity protection, mutual interference protection
Response time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating -25°C to 55°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
SUS316L
Cable
Oil-resistant vinyl cable
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Display
PES (polyethersulfone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Oil Resistance
Tested oil and lubricant resistance
Test oil type
Product name
Kinetic viscosity at 40°C (mm2/s)
pH (dilution rate)
Lubricants
Velocity Oil No. 3
2.02
–
Non-water-soluble cutting oils
Yushiron Oil No.2 AC
Less than 10
–
Water-soluble
cutting oils
Yushiroken EC50T3
–
10.1 (×30)
Yushiroken EC50T5
9.9 (×30)
Yushiroken S46D
9.9 (×50)
Yushiroken S50N
8.6 (×50)
Yushiron Lubic HWC68
9.1 (×30)
Yushiroken Synthetic #770TG
9.9 (×20)
Emulcut FA-900ST
9.7 (×30)
Multicool CSF-9000
9.7 (×20)
Sugicut CS-68JS-1
9.6 (×20)
Toyocool 3A-666
9.6 (×20)
Gryton 1700
9.1 (×10)
Gryton 1700D
9.3 (×3)
1. The Sensor was immersed in the above oils for 240 h at 55°C and then passed an insulation resistance test at 100 M.
2. Use the kinetic viscosities and pHs in the above table as a guide when using the Sensor in environments containing oils not listed in
the table. Additives in the oil may also affect performance. Always test applicability in advance.
Highly visible orange LED
More oil resistant models see
page 24
General purpose
36
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
For M12 and Twist&Click
connectors see page 151.
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3ZM-B
Transparent object detection sensor in
compact stainless steel housing
The E3ZM-B family provides models for the general transparent material detection
and specialized models providing highest stability for the detection of PET bottles.
1
• Stable PET detection using double refraction and AC3 power control technology
• Detergent resistant compact SUS316L housing
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Sensing distance
Optimised for PET
bottles and trays
100 to 500 mm
(teachable)
Special reflector
*1
*2
*3
*4
For all transparent
media (glass, PET,
foils)
100 to 500 mm
(potentiometer
adjustment)*3
Compact
Order separately*2
Order separately*4
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
E39-RP1 included
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
M18 cylindrical
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-B61 2M
E3ZM-B81 2M

–
–
–
E3ZM-B66
E3ZM-B86
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-B61-C 2M
E3ZM-B81-C 2M

–
–
–
E3ZM-B66-C
E3ZM-B86-C
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-B61T 2M
E3ZM-B81T 2M

–
–
–
E3ZM-B66T
E3ZM-B86T
PET optimised models are Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire. E3ZM-B_T all transparent media types are Light-ON/ Dark-ON switch selectable
For higher signal stability using circular polarisation functionality for PET bottles, order special reflector E39-RP1 separately
Teachable all-transparent-media types are available. Contact your OMRON representative
Order reflector separately
Specifications
Item
PET optimised (teachable)
all-transparent-media (potentiometer adjustment)
NPN
E3ZM-B61(-C)/-B66(-C)
E3ZM-B6_T
PNP
E3ZM-B81(-C)/-B86(-C)
E3ZM-B8_T
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (650 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, ±10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention, and reversed output polarity protection
Repsonse time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
-40°C to 60°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
-25° to 55°C
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Case
SUS316L
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Cable
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)
Utilisation of double reflection effect in PET
for higher detection stability (PET optimised
models)
Automatic LED power adjustment (AC3) to
compensate for soiling and temperature
fluctuations (PET optimised models)
Detergent resistant
For more information on
solutions for transparent objects
see page 20
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Detergent resistant reflectors
page 60 and cable connectors
page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
37
E3T
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensor in miniature plastic
housing
Small sized photoelectric sensors in flat and side view shape for demanding mounting conditions.
•
•
•
•
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Through-beam
Small size with precision pinpoint LED where space is crucial
3.5 mm flat model with reliable background suppression and small black/white error
Unique optical alignment technology ensuring minimal deviation of optical axis
High EMC and ambient light immunity
NPN output
PNP output
Light-ON
M2
E3T-ST31 2M
E3T-ST33 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-ST32 2M
E3T-ST34 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-ST11 2M
E3T-ST13 2M
M3
E3T-ST11M 2M
E3T-ST13M 2M
M2
E3T-ST12 2M
E3T-ST14 2M
M3
E3T-ST12M 2M
E3T-ST14M 2M
M2
E3T-ST21 2M
E3T-ST23 2M
M3
E3T-ST21M 2M
E3T-ST23M 2M
M2
E3T-ST22 2M
E3T-ST24 2M
M3
E3T-ST22M 2M
E3T-ST24M 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FT11 2M
E3T-FT13 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FT12 2M
E3T-FT14 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FT21 2M
E3T-FT23 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FT22 2M
E3T-FT24 2M
30 to 200 mm*2
on reflectors/
10 to 100 mm*2
on reflective foils
Light-ON
M2
E3T-SR41-C 2M*3
E3T-SR43-C 2M*3
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-SR42-C 2M*3
E3T-SR44-C 2M*3
5 to 30 mm
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FD11 2M
E3T-FD13 2M
M3
E3T-FD11M 2M
E3T-FD13M 2M
M2
E3T-FD12 2M
E3T-FD14 2M
M3
E3T-FD12M 2M
E3T-FD14M 2M
M2
E3T-SL11 2M
E3T-SL13 2M
M3
E3T-SL11M 2M
E3T-SL13M 2M
M2
E3T-SL12 2M
E3T-SL14 2M
M3
E3T-SL12M 2M
E3T-SL14M 2M
M2
E3T-SL21 2M
E3T-SL23 2M
M3
E3T-SL21M 2M
E3T-SL23M 2M
M2
E3T-SL22 2M
E3T-SL24 2M
M3
E3T-SL22M 2M
E3T-SL24M 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FL11 2M
E3T-FL13 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FL12 2M
E3T-FL14 2M
Light-ON
M2
E3T-FL21 2M
E3T-FL23 2M
Dark-ON
M2
E3T-FL22 2M
E3T-FL24 2M
2m
–
–
2m
Light-ON
Dark-ON
500 mm
For ordering pigtail versions replace '2M' of cable types with:
- M1J: M12 with 30 cm cable
- M3J: M8 4-pin with 30 cm cable
- M5J: M8 3-pin with 30 cm cable
300 mm
Limited-reflective
5 to 15 mm
5 to 30 mm
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
1 to 15 mm
1 to 30 mm
*1
*2
*3
Dark-ON
Light-ON
Dark-ON
Light-ON
Dark-ON
For pre-wired models with robotic cables add '-R' to the order code (example: E3T-FT21R 2M)
The distances are measured with reflector E39-R4 and reflective foil E39-R37-CA. For applications with shorter distances between the sensor and the reflector contact your OMRON representative.
Order reflector separately. Models with included reflectors are available.
For smaller size see E32
General purpose
38
Fork
Order code*1
300 mm
Diffuse-reflective
Miniature
Mounting screw
size
Connection method
Dark-ON
Retro-reflective
Compact
Operation
mode
Sensing distance
1m
Through-beam
M18 cylindrical
For reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3T
Photoelectric sensors
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
Side-view
Flat
Side-view
E3T-ST1
E3T-ST2
E3T-ST3
E3T-FT1
E3T-FT2
E3T-SR4
Sensing distance
E3T-ST3_: 2 m
E3T-ST1_: 1 m
E3T-ST2_: 300 mm
E3T-FT1_: 500 mm
E3T-FT2_: 300 mm
30 to 200 mm (with E39-R4)
10 to 100 mm (with E39-R37-CA)
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (“Pin-point” LED) = 650 nm
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply and control output reverse polarity protection
Output short-circuit protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-25 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Display window
Denatured polyarylate
Lens
Denatured polyarylate
Item
Power supply and control output reverse polarity protection
Output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention,
surge suppressor
-40 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Methacrylic resin
Diffuse-reflective
Limited-reflective
Flat
Side-view
Diffuse-reflective (background suppression)
E3T-FD1
E3T-SL1
E3T-SL2
E3T-FL1
E3T-FL2
Sensing distance
5 to 30 mm
5 to 15 mm
5 to 30 mm
1 to 15 mm
1 to 30 mm
Black/white error
–
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (“Pin-point” LED) = 650 nm
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply and control output reverse polarity protection
Output short-circuit protection, Mutual interference prevention
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-25 to 55°C
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Display window
Denatured polyarylate
Lens
Denatured polyarylate
Flat
15% max.
-40 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
(mm)
25
Light receiving lens
Flip chip (IC)
20
Light receiving
element
15
10
5
0
Rear
Front
Side
White paper Black paper
[email protected]
Minimal black / white error
The coaxial optics and the small focal lens
of the retro-reflective models allow the
detection of small (dia 2 mm) objects or
through small holes (dia 2 mm).
The unique light receiving lens shape and the
chip mounting technology, provide
appropriate sensing distances for very
precise and reliable detection even through
smallest slits and gaps with e.g. 0.5 mm dia.
Models with mounting holes for M2 or
M3 screws
For smaller size see E32
General purpose
For reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
39
1
Item
Photoelectric sensors
Specifications
E3S-CL
Photoelectric sensors
Distance-settable photoelectric sensor in
metal housing
• Minimal black/white error for highest reliability detecting differently coloured
objects (E3S-CL1)
• Setting distance up to 500 mm with reliable background suppression
Special models
Ordering information
Sensortype
Sensing distance
Distance-settable
(background suppression)
5
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Order code*1
Connection method
40mm
Fork
–
–

–
E3S-CL1 2M
–
–
–
 M12
E3S-CL1-M1J
–
–

–
E3S-CL2 2M
–
–
–
 M12
E3S-CL2-M1J
Setting range
Min. setting
40 to 200 mm
Max. setting
5
Detecting range
200mm
5 to 200 mm
5
50mm
Min. setting
Setting range
50 to 500 mm
Max. setting
5
*1
Detecting range
5 to 500 mm
500mm
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable. NPN/PNP switch selectable
Specifications
Item
Distance-settable (background suppression)
E3S-CL1
E3S-CL2
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (700 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Black/white error*1
2% max.
10% max.
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC [ripple (p-p) 10% included]
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
Ambient
temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
Storage
Degree of protection
Material
*1
2 ms max.
-25 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529 IP67
Case
Zinc diecast
Operation
panel cover
Polyethyl sulfon
Lens
Acrylics
Sensing distance difference between standard white paper (reflectivity 90%) and standard black paper (reflectivity 5%)
For longer distance BGS
see E3G
General purpose
40
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3G
Long distance photoelectric sensor in plastic
housing
Long distance retro-reflective and teachable distance-settable sensors in plastic
housing.
1
• Distance-settable model with 1.2 m maximum setting distance
• M12 rotary connector or pre-wired models
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
0.5 to 10 m*2
M18 cylindrical
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
Distance-settable (background suppression) 0.2 to 2 m
(0.2 to 1.2 m distance settable)
*1
*2
Compact
–
–
2m
–
E3G-R13-G 2M
–

–
–
E3G-R17-G
–
–
2m
–
E3G-L73 2M
–

–
–
E3G-L77
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable. NPN / PNP switch selectable
Measured with E39-R2
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Distance-settable (background suppression)
E3G-R13-G
E3G-R17-G
E3G-L73
E3G-L77
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (700 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC (Ripple (p-p) 10% included)
10 to 30 VDC (Ripple (p-p) 10% included)
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection,
mutual interference prevention
1 ms
5 ms
Response time
Ambient temperature
Operating
-25 to 55°C
Storage
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IEC 60529 IP67 (with Protective Cover attached)
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Acrylics (PMMA)
For long distance throughbeam
see E3Z Laser
General purpose
Reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
41
E3JK
Photoelectric sensors
All voltage photoelectric sensor in
plastic housing
The square sized E3JK family provides 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC power
supply voltage.
• 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC supply voltage
• Relay outputs with long life expectancy and high switching capacity (3 A, 250 VAC)
• cULus recognized
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Through-beam
5m
–
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Retro-reflective without M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
–
2m
M18 cylindrical
–
2m
4 m (adjustable)
300 mm (adjustable)
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Operation mode
Order code
Light ON
E3JK-5M1-N 2M
Dark ON
E3JK-5M2-N 2M
Light ON
E3JK-R2M1 2M
Dark ON
E3JK-R2M2 2M
Light ON
E3JK-R4M1 2M
Dark ON
E3JK-R4M2 2M
Light ON
E3JK-DS30M1 2M
Dark ON
E3JK-DS30M2 2M
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Retro-reflective
without M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
E3JK-R4M_
E3JK-DS30M_
E3JK-5M_
E3JK-R2M_
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 240 VDC ±10% ripple (p-p) : 10% max. 24 to 240 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz
Control output
Relay output 3A max. at 250VAC/10m A at 5VDC min.
Response time
30 ms max.
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to 55°C
Storage
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
Infrared LED (870 nm)
–
IEC60529 IP64
Case
ABS
Lens
Acrylics (PMMA)
For timer function in AC/DC
and longer distance see E3JM
General purpose
42
Reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3JM
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
All voltage photoelectric sensor in
plastic housing with timer function
The square sized E3JM family provides 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC power
supply voltage, an enhanced sensing distance and a timer function.
1
• 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC supply voltage
• Relay or solid state relay output
• Models with timer function
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
10 m
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
700 mm (adjustable)
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Timer function
Relay output
DC SSR output
minus common
plus common
E3JM-10M4-G-N
E3JM-10S4-G-N
E3JM-10R4-G-N
ON or OFF delay 0.1 s to 5 s
(adjustable)
E3JM-10M4T-G-N
E3JM-10S4T-G-N
E3JM-10R4T-G-N
–
E3JM-R4M4-G
E3JM-R4S4-G
E3JM-R4R4-G
ON or OFF delay 0.1 s to 5 s
(adjustable)
E3JM-R4M4T-G
E3JM-R4S4T-G
E3JM-R4R4T-G
–
E3JM-DS70M4-G
E3JM-DS70S4-G
E3JM-DS70R4-G
ON or OFF delay 0.1 s to 5 s
(adjustable)
E3JM-DS70M4T-G
E3JM-DS70S4T-G
E3JM-DS70R4T-G
Terminal block –
(with PG 13.5)
4m
Diffuse-reflective
*1
Connection
method
M18 cylindrical
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3JM-10
E3JM-10_ T
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
E3JM-R
E3JM-D
E3JM-R_ T
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (950 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 240 VDC ±10% ripple (p-p) : 10% max. 24 to 240 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz
Control output
Red LED (660 nm)
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A max.; 5 VDC, 10 mA min.
DC SSR output
48 VDC, 100 mA max.; residual voltage 2V
Relay output
30 ms max.
DC SSR output
5 ms max.
Timer function
ON/OFF delay
–
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to 55°C
Storage
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Response time
Degree of protection
Material
0.1 s to 5 s
–
E3JM-D_ T
Infrared LED (950 nm)
0.1 s to 5 s
–
0.1 s to 5 s
IEC60529 IP66
Case
ABS
Lens
Methacrylate resin
For longer distance in
AC/DC see E3G-M
General purpose
Reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
43
E3G-M
Photoelectric sensors
Long distance all voltage photoelectric
sensor in plastic housing
The E3G-M series offers the long sensing distance of the E3G family for all voltage
(AC and DC) installations.
• 12 to 240 VDC and 24 to 240 VAC power supply
• Terminal block connection
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Timer function
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
0.5 to 10 m*2
(Red light)
Terminal block (with PG 13.5 conduit)
–
E3G-MR19-G
ON or OFF delay 0 to 5 s (adjustable)
E3G-MR19T-G
–
E3G-ML79-G
ON or OFF delay 0 to 5 s (adjustable)
E3G-ML79T-G
Relay output
Distance-settable
(background suppression)
*1
*2
0.2 to 2 m
(0.2 to 1.2 m distance settable)
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Measured with E39-R2
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Distance-settable (background suppression)
E3G-MR19-G
E3G-MR19T-G
Light source
(wave length)
Red LED (700 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 240 VDC ±10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
24 to 240 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz
Response time
30 ms
Timer function
–
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-25 to 55°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67 (with protective cover attached)
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Acrylics (PMMA)
E3G-ML79-G
E3G-ML79T-G
Infrared LED (860 nm)
ON delay/OFF delay
0 to 5 s
(Adjuster variable system)
–
ON delay/OFF delay
0 to 5 s
(Adjuster variable system)
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
For smaller size in AC/DC
see E3JK
General purpose
44
Reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3S-LS3
Photoelectric sensor for structured object
detection in plastic housing
The special wide beam and limited-reflective optics of the E3S-LS3 ensures reliable
detection of structured objects (with holes or different heights) and can be used for
example to detect printed circuit boards (PCBs).
1
• Wide beam and limited-reflective optics for the reliable detection of structured,
shiny and irregularly shaped objects
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
M18 cylindrical
Connection method
Compact
Timer function
Output
Miniature
Fork
Order code
Light ON
Limited-reflective
20 to 35 mm (Red light)
–
–
2m
–
No
NPN
–
–
2m
–
No
PNP
10 to 60 mm (Red light)
20 to 35 mm
E3S-LS3NW 2M
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
E3S-LS3P-M5J
–
E3S-LS3PT-M5J
 M8 4-pin No
2m
–
E3S-LS3P-M3J
Yes
E3S-LS3PT-M3J
No
E3S-LS3PW 2M
Yes
E3S-LS3PWT 2M
 M8 3-pin No
E3S-LS3PW-M5J
Yes
–
–
–
E3S-LS3P 2M
E3S-LS3PT 2M
 M8 3-pin No
Yes
10 to 60 mm
E3S-LS3N 2M
E3S-LS3PWT-M5J
 M8 4-pin No
E3S-LS3PW-M3J
Yes
E3S-LS3PWT-M3J
Specifications
Item
Limited-reflective
E3S-LS3_
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (660 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Response time
1 ms max.
Timer function
Ambient
temperature
Available with E3S-LS3P(W)T models only. Time range: 0.1 to 1.0 s (adjustable)
Operating
-10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage
-25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IEC60529 IP40
Case
ABS
Lens
Acrylic
For wide beam models in
E3Z family see page 26
General purpose
More solutions for the PCB
production see page 14
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
For cable connectors see
page 151
Material handling
Accessories
45
E3C-LDA
Photoelectric sensors
High precision Laser sensor with separate
amplifier
The separate amplifier high-precision photoelectric sensors feature a large variety
of different LASER sensing heads for highest precision positioning and detection
applications.
• Easy installation due to adjustable focus point and optical axis
• Wide range sensor head portfolio with different laser beam shapes
• Controller functions with easy wiring concept and power tuning function
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Sensor heads
Sensor type
Beam type
Remarks
Order code
Diffuse-reflective
Spot
Mounting a beam unit (sold separately) allows the use of line and area beams.
E3C-LD11 2M
Line
This model number is for the set consisting of the E39-P11 mounted to the E3C-LD11.
E3C-LD21 2M
Area
This model number is for the set consisting of the E39-P21 mounted to the E3C-LD11.
E3C-LD31 2M
Spot (variable)
Mounting a beam unit (sold separately) allows the use of line and area beams.
E3C-LR11 2M
Spot (2.0 mm fixed dia.)
–
E3C-LR12 2M
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R. (coaxial)
Amplifier units
Item
Functions
Order code
with connector*1
pre-wired
NPN output
PNP output
NPN output
PNP output
Twin-output models
Area output, self-diagnosis, differential operation
E3C-LDA11
E3C-LDA41
E3C-LDA6
E3C-LDA8
External-input models
Remote setting, counter, differential operation
E3C-LDA21
E3C-LDA51
E3C-LDA7
E3C-LDA9
ATC models
Active threshold control
E3C-LDA11AT
E3C-LDA41AT
E3C-LDA6AT
E3C-LDA8AT
Analog models
Analog output
E3C-LDA11AN
E3C-LDA41AN
–
–
E3C-LR11 +
E39-P41
E3C-LR12
*1
order connector (E3X-CN21_) separately from accessories
Specifications
Sensor heads
Item
Diffuse-reflective
E3C-LD11
Retro-reflective with M.S.R. (coaxial)
E3C-LD21
E3C-LD31
E3C-LR11
E3C-LR11 +
E39-P31
Light source
(emission wave length)
Red semiconductor laser diode (650 nm), 2.5 mW max. (JIS standard: Class 2, FDA standard: Class II)
Sensing distance
High-resolution mode: 30 to 1,000 mm
Standard mode: 30 to 700 mm
Super-high-speed mode: 30 to 250 mm
Beam size (typical)
0.8 mm max.
(at distances up to
300 mm)
Functions
Variable focal point mechanism (beam size adjustment) , optical axis adjustment mechanism (axis adjustment)
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP40
33 mm
(at 150 mm)
33x15 mm
(at 150 mm)
1 mW max.
(JIS standard Class 1)
7m
5m
2m
1,700 mm,
1,300 mm
700 mm
900 mm
700 mm
400 mm
7m
5m
2m
0.8 mm max.
(at distances up to
1,000 mm)
28 mm
(at 150 mm)
28x16 mm
(at 150 mm)
2.0 mm dia.
(at distances up to
1,000 mm)
For highest precision and
measurement see ZX-L in
'Quality control & Inspection
guide'
General purpose
46
For reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3C-LDA
Photoelectric sensors
Item
External-input models
Analog
output models
E3C-LDA7
E3C-LDA11
E3C-LDA6
E3C-LDA11AT
E3C-LDA6AT
E3C-LDA11AN
PNP output E3C-LDA51
E3C-LDA9
E3C-LDA41
E3C-LDA8
E3C-LDA41AT
E3C-LDA8AT
E3C-LDA41AN
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Super-high-speed 80 μs
mode
100 μs
High-speed mode
250 μs
Standard mode
1 ms
High-resolution
mode
4 ms
Differential
detection
Switchable between single edge and double edge detection mode.
Single edge: Can be set to 250 μs, 500 μs, 1 ms, 10 ms, or 100 ms.
Double edge: Can be set to 500 μs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 20 ms, or 200 ms.
Timer function
Select from OFF-delay, ON-delay, or one-shot timer.
1 ms to 5 s (1 to 20 ms set in 1-ms increments, 20 to 200 ms set in 10 ms increments, 200 ms to 1 s set in 100-ms increments, and 1 to 5 s set in 1 s increments)
Counter
Switchable between up counter and down
counter.
Set count: 0 to 9,999,999
Analog output
–
I/O settings
External input setting (Select from teaching, Output setting (Select from channel 2 output, Output setting (Select from channel 2 output, Analog output offset
power tuning, zero reset, light OFF,or counter area output, or self-diagnosis.)
area output, self-diagnosis, or ATC error out- voltage adjustment
reset.)
put.)
1
Functions
ATC-output models
NPN output E3C-LDA21
Supply voltage
Response
time
Twin-output models
Photoelectric sensors
Amplifier units
–
1 to 5 VDC
Digital display
Select from digital incident level + threshold or six other patterns.
Display orientation
Switching between normal/reversed display is possible.
Degree of protection
IP50 (IEC 60529)
Amplifier Connectors
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Full control over the beam shape
Line beam
Spot beam
Area beam
Axis and focal point adjustment
High precision positioning and detection over
long range
Diffuse reflective:
1m
Retro-reflective:
7m
For highest precision and
measurement see ZX-L in
'Quality control & Inspection
guide'
General purpose
For reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
47
E3F2
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensor in plastic or brass M18
housing
The E3F2 family combines the high sensing performance of Omron's core sensing
technology, with the simple mounting of the cylindrical shape. This makes the family
ideally suited for a wide range of applications providing high reliability, long sensor
lifetime and easy installation.
• Plastic or metal (brass) housings
• IP67, IP69K for highest water resistance
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
Sensing distance
7m
0.1 to 4 m*2
(adjustable)
0.3 m (adjustable)
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
100 mm (fixed)
(background suppression)
*1
*2
Housing material
M18 cylindrical
Connection method
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
Plastic
Brass
–
–
2m
–
–

–
–
–
–
2m
–
–

–
–
–
–
2m
–
–

–
–
–
–
2m
–
–

–
–
–
–
2m
–
–

–
–
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
NPN output
PNP output
E3F2-7C4 2M
E3F2-7C4-M 2M
E3F2-7C4-P1
E3F2-7C4-M1-M
E3F2-R4C4-E 2M
E3F2-R4C4-M-E 2M
E3F2-R4C4-P1-E
E3F2-R4C4-M1-M-E
E3F2-DS30C4 2M
E3F2-DS30C4-M 2M
E3F2-DS30C4-P1
E3F2-DS30C4-M1-M
E3F2-D1C4 2M
E3F2-D1C4-M 2M
E3F2-D1C4-P1
E3F2-D1C4-M1-M
E3F2-LS10C4 2M
E3F2-LS10C4-M 2M
E3F2-LS10C4-P1
E3F2-LS10C4-M1-M
E3F2-7B4 2M
E3F2-7B4-M 2M
E3F2-7B4-P1
E3F2-7B4-M1-M
E4F2-R4B4-E 2M
E3F2-R4B4-M-E 2M
E3F2-R4B4-P1-E
E3F2-R4B4-M1-M-E
E3F2-DS30B4 2M
E3F2-DS30B4-M 2M
E3F2-DS30B4-P1
E3F2-DS30B4-M1-M
E3FR-D1B4 2M
E3F2-D1B4-M 2M
E3F2-D1B4-P1
E3F2-D1B4-M1-M
E3F2-LS10B4 2M
E3F2-LS10B4-M 2M
E3F2-LS10B4-P1
E3F2-LS10B4-M1-M
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
Measured using E39-R1S
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Light source (wave length)
Power supply voltage
Protective circuits
Response time
Ambient
Operating
temperature
Storage
Degree of protection
Material
Case
Lens
For shorter housing
see E3FZ
General purpose
48
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
E3F2-R4_
Red LED (660 nm)
Diffuse-reflective
E3F2-7_
E3F2-DS30_
Infrared LED (950 nm)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
10 to 30 VDC
Output short-circuit protection and power supply reverse polarity protection
2.5 ms max.
1 ms max.
2.5 ms max.
-25 to 55°C
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Plastic ABS
Nickel plated brass
PMMA
High ambient light immunity
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
E3F2-DS1_
1 ms max.
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
High electromagnetic noise immunity
Semiconductor
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
E3F2-LS10_
Red LED (660 nm)
Material handling
Accessories
E3F2-_41
Photoelectric sensor in plastic or brass radial
M18 housing
Radial (angled) optics for easy mounting, installation and adjustment
1
• Diffuse-reflective and retro-reflective models
• IP67 and IP69K
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
0.1 to 2 m*2
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Housing material
M18 cylindrical
–
–
2m
–
Brass
Plastic
–

–
–
Brass
Diffuse-reflective
300 mm (adjustable)
Plastic
–
–
2m
–
Brass
Plastic
–

–
–
Brass
*1
*2
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
Plastic
Compact
NPN output
PNP output
E3F2-R2RC41-E 2M
E3F2-R2RB41-E 2M
E3F2-R2RC41-M-E 2M
E3F2-R2RB41-M-E 2M
E3F2-R2RC41-P1-E
E3F2-R2RB41-P1-E
E3F2-R2RC41-M1-M-E
E3F2-R2RB41-M1-M-E
E3F2-DS30C41 2M
E3F2-DS30B41 2M
E3F2-DS30C41-M 2M
E3F2-DS30B41-M 2M
E3F2-DS30C41-P1
E3F2-DS30B41-P1
E3F2-DS30C41-M1-M
E3F2-DS30B41-M1-M
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
Measured with E39-R1S.
Specifications
Item
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
E3F2-R2R_41-_
E3F2-DS30_41-_
Light source
(wave length)
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection and power supply reverse polarity protection
Response time
2.5 ms max.
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to 55°C
Storage
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Nickel plated brass
Case
Plastic (ABS)
Lens
PMMA
For longer sensing distances,
through-beam or BGS see E3FR
General purpose
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
49
E3FZ/E3FR
Photoelectric sensors
Easy Mounting photoelectric sensor in short
plastic M18 housing
The SecureClick snap mounting technology of the E3FZ provides fast and accurate
mounting where saving installation time is crucial. In addition the short housing and
the flat front of the snap holder make the sensor ideal when protruding sensors and
nuts are not desired.
• SecureClick snap mounting for fast installation
• High power LED for enhanced sensing distance in through beam models
• Short housing with less than 40 mm length
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Snap mounting - E3FZ*1
Sensor type
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Sensing distance
15 m
0.1 to 4 m*4
1 m (adjustable)
2m
–*3
E3FZ-T61H 2M
E3FZ-T81H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FZ-T66H
E3FZ-T86H
–
–
2m
–*3
E3FZ-R61H 2M
E3FZ-R81H 2M
–
–*3
E3FZ-R66H
E3FZ-R86H
2m
–*3
–
100 mm (fixed)
200 mm (fixed)
PNP output
–
–
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
NPN output
–
–
Diffuse-reflective
Order code*2
Connection method

–

–
E3FZ-D62 2M
E3FZ-D82 2M
*3
E3FZ-D67
E3FZ-D87
*3
–
–
–
2m
–
E3FZ-LS61H 2M
E3FZ-LS81H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FZ-LS66H
E3FZ-LS86H
–
–
2m
–*3
E3FZ-LS64H 2M
E3FZ-LS84H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FZ-LS69H
E3FZ-LS89H
Radial mounting - E3FR
Sensor type
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
Sensing distance
15 m
0.1 to 4 m*4
1 m (adjustable)
100 mm (fixed)
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–*3
E3FR-T61H 2M
E3FR-T81H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FR-T66H
E3FR-T86H
–
–
2m
–*3
E3FR-R61H 2M
E3FR-R81H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FR-R66H
E3FR-R86H
–
–
2m
–*3
E3FR-D62 2M
E3FR-D82 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FR-D67
E3FR-D87
–
–
2m
–*3
–
200 mm (fixed)
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
Order code*2
Connection method

–
E3FR-LS61H 2M
E3FR-LS81H 2M
*3
E3FR-LS66H
E3FR-LS86H
*3
–
–
–
2m
–
E3FR-LS64H 2M
E3FR-LS84H 2M
–

–
–*3
E3FR-LS69H
E3FR-LS89H
Mounting with snap holder (provided with product) or M18 nuts (provided with product) possible.
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
Pigtail connectors are available on request
Measured with reflector E39-R1S
For radial mounting with
smaller head see E3F2-_41
For metal housing
see E3F2
General purpose
50
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
More about the usage in
conveying see page 4
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Material handling
Accessories
E3FZ/E3FR
Photoelectric sensors
Through-beam
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
Diffuse-reflective with background suppression
Item
E3FZ-T/E3FR-T
E3FZ-R/E3FR-R
E3FZ-D/E3FR-D
E3F_-LS_1H/E3F_-LS_6H
E3F_-LS_4H/E3F_-LS_9H
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (860 nm)
Red LED (650 nm)
Red LED (660 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC ±10% ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit and power supply reverse polarity protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to 55°C
Storage
-40 to +70°C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Plastic (case: ABS; lens: PMMA)
1
Degree of protection
Photoelectric sensors
Specifications
Easy and fast installation
Conventional
square sensors
Conventional
cylindrical
sensors
The SecureClick snap mounting mechanism provides easy installation in 2 steps and
enhanced protection against vibration.
>>CLICK
Up to 10 times faster
Up to 3 times faster
Installation time can be reduced by up to 10 times compared to conventional sensors.
2
1
E3FZ with
SecureClick*
*SecureClick has been tested to withstand severe vibrations.
For radial mounting with
smaller head see E3F2-_41
For metal housing
see E3F2
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
More about the usage in
conveying see page 4
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Material handling
Accessories
51
E3FZ-B
Photoelectric sensors
Transparent object detection sensor in
compact M18 housing
The E3FZ-B provides enhanced detection stability for the detection of transparent
objects. It allows an easy and intuitive adjustment by potentiometer to adjust to
individual requirements.
• Easy adjustment to individual requirements for all transparent materials
• Easy mounting due to short M18 housing
• Coaxial optics for stable, position-independent detection
Special models
Ordering Information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
M18 cylindrical
0 to 700 mm*3
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
*2
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Compact
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–
E3FZ-B61 2M
E3FZ-B81 2M
–

–
–
E3FZ-B66
E3FZ-B86
*1
*2
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
For ordering pigtail versions contact your OMRON representative. Available options on request are:
- M3J:for M8 4-pin pigtail connector with 30 cm cable
- M5J:for M8 3-pin pigtail connector with 30 cm cable
- M1TJ: for M12 4-pin XS5 smart-click connector with 30 cm cable.
*3
Measured with E39-R1S.
Ratings and Specifications
Item
E3FZ-B_
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (650 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, including 10% ripple (p-p)
Protective circuits
Reversed power supply polarity, load short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention, reversed output polarity protection
Response time
1 ms max.
Ambient temperature
Operating
Storage
Degree of protection
25 to 55C
40 to 70C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Coaxial optics for detection through small
holes
Housing
ABS
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Cable
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)
Position independent stable detection
For more information on
solutions for transparent objects
see page 20
General purpose
52
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3F2-_-S
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensor in stainless steel M18
housing
For areas that undergo frequent cleaning the stainless steel housing of the
E3F2-_-S provides enhanced detergent resistance and longer sensor lifetime.
1
• IP67, IP69K for highest water resistance
• Enhanced detergent resistance certified by ECOLAB
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Through-beam
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
Sensing distance
7m
Stainless steel
0.1 to 4 m*2
(adjustable)
0.3 m (adjustable)
1 m (adjustable)
Diffuse-reflective
100 mm (fixed)
(background suppression)
*1
*2
Housing material
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
M18 cylindrical
Connection method
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–
E3F2-7C4-S 2M
E3F2-7B4-S 2M
–

–
–
E3F2-7C4-M1-S
E3F2-7B4-M1-S
–
–
2m
–
E3F2-R4C4-S-E 2M
E3F2-R4B4-S-E 2M
–

–
–
E3F2-R4C4-M1-S-E
E3F2-R4B4-M1-S-E
–
–
2m
–
E3F2-DS30C4-S 2M
E3F2-DS30B4-S 2M
–

–
–
E3F2-DS30C4-M1-S
E3F2-DS30B4-M1-S
–
–
2m
–
E3F2-D1C4-S 2M
E3F2-D1B4-S 2M
–

–
–
E3F2-D1C4-M1-S
E3F2-D1B4-M1-S
–
–
2m
–
E3F2-LS10C4-S 2M
E3F2-LS10B4-S 2M
–

–
–
E3F2-LS10C4-M1-S
E3F2-LS10B4-M1-S
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
Measured using E39-R1S
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Light source (wave length)
Power supply voltage
Protective circuits
Response time
Ambient
Operating
temperature
Storage
Degree of protection
Material
Case
Lens
E3F2-7_
E3F2-DS30_
Infrared LED (950 nm)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
10 to 30 VDC
Output short-circuit protection and power supply reverse polarity protection
2.5 ms max.
1 ms max.
2.5 ms max.
-25 to 55°C
-30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Stainless steel
PMMA
More stainless steel sensors
see page 24
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Retro-reflective
with M.S.R.
E3F2-R4_
Red LED (660 nm)
Diffuse-reflective
E3F2-DS1_
1 ms max.
Detergent resistant reflectors see
page 61 and cable connectors
see page 151
High water and detergent resistance
Automotive
Semiconductor
Diffuse-reflective
(background suppression)
E3F2-LS10_
Red LED (660 nm)
Material handling
Accessories
53
E3H2
Photoelectric sensors
Miniature photoelectric sensors in cylindrical
M8 and M12 housing
• M8 or M12 sized cylindrical housings when mounting space is crucial
• Retro-reflective models with two teaching modes for standard and semitransparent objects
• pre-wired and connector models
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
M12 cylindrical housing
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
4 m (adjustable)
Retro-reflective with
M.S.R.
2 m (teachable*2)
Diffuse-reflective
300 mm (teachable)
100 mm (fixed)
*1
*2
*3
Order code*1
Connection method
–
–
–
–
–
NPN output
PNP output
2m
–
E3H2-T4C4M 2M
E3H2-T4B4M 2M

–
–
E3H2-T4C4M-M1
E3H2-T4B4M-M1
–
2m
–
E3H2-R2C4M 2M*3
E3H2-R2B4M 2M*3

–
–
E3H2-R2C4M-M1*3
E3H2-R2B4M-M1*3
–
–
2m
–
E3H2-DS30C4M 2M
E3H2-DS30B4M 2M
–

–
–
E3H2-DS30C4M-M1
E3H2-DS30B4M-M1
–
–
2m
–
E3H2-DS10C4M 2M
E3H2-DS10B4M 2M
–

–
–
E3H2-DS10C4M-M1
E3H2-DS10B4M-M1
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable by wire
Models without teach-button are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Without reflector; order reflector separately
M8 cylindrical housing
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
Connection method
2m
Operation mode
–
–
2m
–

–
–
–
–
–
2m
–

–
–
–
dark on
light on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3H2-T2C2S 2M
E3H2-T2B2S 2M
E3H2-T2C2S-M5
E3H2-T2B2S-M5
E3H2-T2C1S 2M
E3H2-T2B1S 2M
E3H2-T2C1S-M5
E3H2-T2B1S-M5
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3H2-T4
E3H2-T2
Retro-reflective with M.S.R.
Diffuse-reflective
E3H2-R
E3H2-DS30
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC, 10% ripple
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection
Response time
2.5 ms max
1 ms max.
1.1 ms max
Sensitivity adjustment
Potentiometer adjuster
–
Teach-in
Ambient
temperature
-25 to +55°C
-25 to +50°C
-25 to +55°C
stainless steel
nickel-plated brass
Operating
Degree of protection
EN 60529: IP67
Material
Case
nickel-plated brass
Lens
plastic
E3H2-DS10
–
Reflectors see page 60;
cable connectors see page 151
General purpose
54
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3T-C
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Miniature photoelectric sensors in M5 and
M6 sized housing
The E3T-C family of miniature photoelectric sensors is the ideal solution when
mounting space is crucial.
1
• axial and radial M5 sized through-beam sensors
• axial M6 sized diffuse-reflective sensors
• pre-wired models in stainless steel housing
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
M5 cylindrical housing
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Connection method
Operation mode
Through-beam (axial)
1m
–
–
2m
–
Through-beam (radial)
500 mm
–
–
2m
–
dark on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3T-CT12 2M
E3T-CT14 2M
E3T-CT22S 2M
E3T-CT24S 2M
M6 cylindrical housing
Sensor type
Diffuse-reflective
Sensing distance
50 mm (adjustable)
Connection method
–
–
Operation mode
2m
–
light on
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3T-CD11 2M
E3T-CD13 2M
Specifications
Item
E3T-CT1_
E3T-CT2_
E3T-CD1_
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (630 nm)
Red LED (625 nm)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection,
Output short-circuit protection
Response time
Ambient temperature
0.5 ms max.
Operating
–25 to +55°C
Storage
–30 to +70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
General purpose
IEC 60529 IP65
Case
SUS303
Display window
Polysulfone Epoxy
Lens
Polysulfone
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
55
E3Z-G
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensor in 25 mm plastic
fork shape housing
The forked shape optical through-beam sensors combine simple installation with
reliable passage detection of object, machine parts or transportation elements like
hanggliders.
• Fork shape for simple installation
• 1 or 2 axis models
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Through-beam
Sensing distance
Number of
optical axes
25 mm
(Infrared light)
1
2
*1
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Order code*1
Connection method
–
–
2m
–
–
–
–
–
2m
–
–
–
–
NPN output
PNP output
E3Z-G61 2M
E3Z-G81 2M
 M8 4-pin E3Z-G61-M3J
–
E3Z-G62 2M
 M8 4-pin E3Z-G62-M3J
E3Z-G81-M3J
E3Z-G822M
E3Z-G82-M3J
Light-ON / Dark-ON switch selectable
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E3Z-G
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10% max. ripple (p-p): 10%
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection, and mutual interference prevention, power supply, reverse polarity protection
Response time
Ambient temperature
1 ms max.
Operating
-25 to +55°C
Storage
-40 to +70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP64
Material
ABS
For a smaller size fork shape
see EE-SPX_03
General purpose
56
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
EE-SPX_03
Photomicrosensor in 13 mm plastic
fork shape housing
With a slot width of 13 mm the EE-SPX_03 provides stable detection of machine parts
or smaller objects.
1
• 13 mm slot width
• 12 to 24 VDC supply voltage
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Special models
Ordering information
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Through-beam
13 mm
(slot width) (infrared
light)
*1
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Connection method
Operation mode
NPN output
PNP output
Connector 3-pin*1
Dark-ON
EE-SPX303N
EE-SPX303N + EE-2002
Light-ON
EE-SPX403N
EE-SPX403N + EE-2002
Fork
Order code
Order connector separately from accessories for either NPN or PNP types
Accessories
Type
Cable
Comment
Order code
Cable connector
2M PVC
For NPN types only (cannot be combined with
EE-2002)
EE-1010 2M
Special cable to convert NPN to PNP
+
Brown
OUT
Black
–
Blue
EE-2002
2M robotic PVC
NPN/PNP conversion cable
0.5 m incl converter
EE-1010-R 2M
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10% max. ripple (p-p): 5% max.
Response frequency
100 Hz min
Ambient temperature
Operating
-10° to +55°C
Storage
-25° to 65°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50
Material
Case
Polycarbonate
For a smaller size fork shape
see EE-SX
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
57
EE-SX97
Photoelectric sensors
Photomicrosensor in 5 mm plastic fork
shape housing
The small sized EE-SX97 family of photomicrosensors provides accurate detection of
machine parts or small objects independent of material or magnetic fields and at best
value for money.
• Response frequency up to 1 kHz
• Space saving housing and connector integration
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Connector models
Sensor type
Sensing distance Connection method
Through-beam
5 mm
(slot width)
(Infrared light)
*1
*2
*3
Connector (4 pin)*3
Operation Mode
Shape*1
Order code *2
NPN output
PNP output
Dark-ON/Light-ON
(selectable)
Standard
EE-SX970-C1
EE-SX970P-C1
L-shaped
EE-SX971-C1
EE-SX971P-C1
T-shaped, 7 mm
EE-SX972-C1
EE-SX972P-C1
Close-mounting
EE-SX974-C1
EE-SX974P-C1
T-shaped, 10 mm
EE-SX975-C1
EE-SX975P-C1
F-shaped
EE-SX976-C1
EE-SX976P-C1
R-shaped
EE-SX977-C1
EE-SX977P-C1
For shape dimensions and variations see dimensions in back of the guide or refer to www.industrial.omron.eu
Antivalent output (Light-ON and Dark-ON output available on different pins)
Order the special connector separately from the cable connector section. For pre-wired models with 1m cable refer to EE-SX67 family in complete datasheet.
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Power supply voltage
5 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Response frequency
1 kHz min. (3 kHz average)
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to +55°C
Storage
-30 to +80°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP50
Material
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Polycarbonate
Easy to mount end position detection / limit
sensors (contactless).
For mechanical limit switches
see page 130
General purpose
58
For connectors see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
EE-SX77/87
Photoelectric sensors
Photoelectric sensors
Photomicrosensor in thin 5 mm fork shape
plastic housing
Thin shaped photomicrosensor for space saving mounting.
1
• Compact, thin profile enables mounting where space is crucial
• Indicator is visible from both sides
• Operating voltage range: 5 to 24 VDC
Special models
Ordering information
M18 cylindrical
Compact
Miniature
Fork
Pre-wired models
Sensor type
Through-beam
Sensing distance
5 mm
(slot width)
(Infrared light)
Shape*1
Connection method
–
–
2m
–
Standard
L-shaped
T-shaped
*1
Operation
mode
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Dark-ON
EE-SX770
EE-SX770P
Light-ON
EE-SX870
EE-SX870P
Dark-ON
EE-SX771
EE-SX771P
Light-ON
EE-SX871
EE-SX871P
Dark-ON
EE-SX772
EE-SX772P
Light-ON
EE-SX872
EE-SX872P
For shape dimensions refer to www.industrial.omron.eu
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
EE-SX77/EE-SX87
Sensing distance
5 mm (slot width)
Power supply voltage
5 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Response frequency
Ambient temperature
1 kHz min. (3 kHz average)
Operating
-25 to +55°C
Storag
-30 to +80°C (with no icing)
Degree of protection
Material
IEC60529 IP60
Case
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Lens
Polycarbonate
For the complete range of
photomicrosensors
please visit our website at
www.industrial.omron.eu
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
59
E39
Reflectors
Reflectors for retro-reflective photoelectric sensors
Shape
Type
Housing material
Features
Size in mm
Applicable Sensor
Order code
General purpose
reflectors
• ABS base
• Acrylic surface
Surface screw mounting
(diagonal holes)
40x60x7.5
• Retro-reflective photoelectric
sensors - without M.S.R*1
• Retro-reflective photoelectric
sensors - with M.S.R.*1
E39-R1S
Surface screw mounting
(holes on one side only)
35.4x42.3x8
E39-R9
51.4x60.3x8.5
E39-R42
Small size
Side screw mounting or surface 41.8x22.5x11
selfadhesive
E39-R3
Surface screw mounting
23x13.7x4.9
E39-R4
100x100x9
E39-R8
84.5x84.5x8.7
E39-R40
Large size
High precision
*1
Microtripel for improved
performance with fine beam
sensors
Recommended for fine beam
coaxial models (E3C-LR,
E3S-CR62/67, E3T-SR4)
E39-R6
30x45
E39-R12
14x23x1
E39-R37-CA
12x24
E39-R13
Simple mounting
Round shape with centered
Diameter: 84
mounting hole for simple screw Depth: 7.4
mounting
Photoelectric sensors with and
without M.S.R.*1
E39-R7
Snap mounting
Snap mounting for fast
installation
Recommended for snap mounting
sensor E3FZ
E39-R49
For more details on M.S.R. refer to page 155
Note: the ambient operating temperature is -25°C to 55°C unless otherwise specified
60
52x40x4.8
Diameter: 30
Diameter of snap mount
tool: 5
E39
Housing material
Features
Enhanced
detergent
resistance
• PVC
• Surface screw mounting
40x60x7.5
• IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Size in mm
Applicable Sensor
Order code
Recommended for harsh
environment sensors
E39-R50
20x60x6
E39-R51
Highest detergent
resistance
• SUS316L
• Borosilicat
• Surface screw mounting
43x30x5
E39-R16
Heat resistant
• Borosilicat
• Surface screw mounting
• 450°C heat resistance
• Suitable for vacuum
environment
95x51x8
E39-R47
Non-fogging
reflector
• ABS
• Acrylic surface
Anti-fogging coating
40x60x7.5
E39-R1K
Special polarizing
• ABS base
• PMMA surface
Special polarizing filter to PET
44x80x8.5
E3ZM-B
E39-RP1
General purpose
tape reflectors
• Acrylic
• Self adhesive
• Pre cut
35x10x0.6
Photoelectric sensors with and
without M.S.R.*1
E39-RS1
Optimised for E3T-SR4
40x35x0.6
80x70x0.6
• Self adhesive
• Pre cut
E39-RS3-CA
25 mm x 5 m
E39-RS25 5 m
25 mm x 22.8 m
E39-RS25 22.8 m
50 mm x 5 m
E39-RS50 5 m
50 mm x 22.8 m
E39-RS50 22.8 m
195x22
108x46
*1
E39-RS2-CA
E39-RS3
Optimised for E3T-SR4
High precision tape
reflectors
E39-RS1-CA
E39-RS2
Optimised for E3T-SR4
• Self adhesive
• Cut-to-length, roll material
Reflectors
Type
1
Shape
Reflectors
Recommended for fine beam and
laser sensors (E3S-CR62/67, E3C,
E3X)
E39-RS4
E39-RS5
For more details on M.S.R. refer to page 151
Note: Note: the ambient operating temperature is -25°C to 55°C unless otherwise specified
61
AS
Accessories
Mounting brackets
Shape
Type
Material
Features
Order code
M8 nuts
brass
100 pcs
ASMM0800
M12 nuts
stainless steel
ASMM0801
brass
ASMM1200
M18 nuts
ASMM1800
stainless steel
ASMM1802
plastic
1 pc
ASMK1802
M30 nuts
brass
100 pcs
ASMM3000
M8 Washer
brass
1,000 pcs
ASZA0800
M12 Washer
M18 Washer
M30 Washer
62
ASZA1200
stainless steel
500pcs
ASZA1201
brass
100 pcs
ASZA1801
stainless steel
200 pcs
ASZA1802
brass
100 pcs
ASZA3001
E39/Y92E-B
Accessories
Type
Order code
Quick access - snap fix for cylindrical sensors; sizes M8, M12, M18, M30
Y92E-BC08
Y92E-BC12
Y92E-BC18
Y92E-BC30
Surface mounting for snap mount sensor E3FZ (dia 20mm hole)
E39-EL8
Surface mounting for M18 cylindrical sensors (dia 18mm)
E39-EL12
Telescope mounting for 12 mm rod for snap mount sensor E3FZ
E39-EL9
Standard-surface mounting (for pre-wired or pigtail models)
E39-L104 *1
Standard-backwall mounting
E39-L44 *1
Protection-wall mounting (for pre-wired or pigtail models)
E39-L142 *1
Protection-surface mounting
E39-L98 *1
Telescope mounting
E39-L93FH
3D rotation mounting
E39-EL4
Snap mount accessory for E3Z (for 3mm wall thickness; hole size 33 x 14.5mm, 10 pcs. per package)
E39-EL7S-E3Z
1
Shape
Accessories
Mounting brackets
*1
The order references are examples for the E3Z sensor family. Refer to the sensor accessory datasheet E26E for the complete list of mounting brackets.
63
MARK SENSORS
Choose the performance you need
In packaging machines to ensure the correct positioning of packaging material before filling or closing
operations, characteristic registration marks or design elements have to be detected. At OMRON we closely
work together with leading packaging machine makers to evaluate the requirements for sensors from
commonly used packaging material as well as most critical designs or materials. In addition the performance requirements vary according to the overall machine value concept.
• Reliable mark detection even in changing environmental conditions during machine operation
• Fast and easy setup up after packaging material exchange
• Performance levels fitting the machine value concept:
Best choice in value for money
Best in reliability, flexibility, stability
Best performance for dedicated applications
Standard print mark detection
Challenging designs or colour marks
For print marks most commonly used in the
packaging and printing industry, the
contrast sensors with white LED have an
optimised light intensity and RGB ratio
evaluation algorithm ensuring a stable and
fast detection.
Objects with complex designs or where the
contrast between print mark and
background is low, require sensors that
allow an easy adaption to the specific
requirements of the particular task.
• Compact housing concept for high
flexibility in machine design
• Fast response time of 50 μs
E3ZM-V
Autoteach and white LED
see page 67
64
• Amplifiers with digital value displays and
advanced signal evaluation functions for
application optimised settings
• Wide range of sensing heads fitting the
application and distance requirements
E3X-DAC-S
White LED, RGB ratio comparison and
extended functionality
see page 68
Complex shape and position detection and
synchronized quality inspection.
For positioning and machine synchronisation
tasks e.g. requiring the recognition of words
or symbols, the shape, position detection
functionalities of the vision sensors and
systems can be set up to provide solutions
for the most complex and challenging tasks.
The vision systems can also detect the
registration mark and perform position and
quality inspections at the same time.
FQ
Xpectia lite
Simply guided and
crystal clear
Performance in touch
with simplicity
Refer to QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION GUIDE
COLOUR SENSORS
Mark and colour sensors
Choose the performance you need
For the verification of correctly coloured bottle caps or for sorting and classification tasks, the OMRON
colour sensors provide a wide performance range from:
Easy one or multi colour detection at excellent value for money
Colour detection with the flexibility of a vision sensor yet easy to set up and use
Highest colour detection and processing performance with the flexibility and power of a vision system
2
Output
Application performance level
Colour
detected –
digital output
RGB value out
(via ethernet)
HSV value out
(via ethernet)
Xpectia lite
Highest performance image processing
Tolerance
Full real colour &
image processing
flexibility
Refer to QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION GUIDE
CLR-V32
Complex colour, shape and position
verification (combinations), remotely
programmable
Teachable, auto or
manually
adjustable
tolerance range
page 71
Adjustable inspection area
CLR-V1
page 71
CLR-X4
Teachable or auto
tolerance range
Multi Colour Memory
Single Colour
page 70
CLR-X1
page 70
65
66
E3ZM-V
Mark sensors
Registration mark sensor in compact
stainless steel housing
The registration mark detection sensor in a compact stainless steel housing provides
reliable detection of all common registration marks in food packaging applications.
White LED for stable detection of differently coloured or black print marks
SUS 316L stainless steel housing
Easy-to-use teach-in button or remote teach
Fast response time of 50 μs
Mark sensors
•
•
•
•
Sensor type
Sensing distance
Mark sensor
*1
2
Ordering information
Order code*1
Connection method
12±2 mm
NPN output
PNP output
–
–
2m
–
E3ZM-V61 2M
E3ZM-V81 2M

–
–
–
E3ZM-V66
E3ZM-V86
The output configuration (ON or OFF when mark is detected) is teachable. Common operation is output is ON when mark is detected.
Specifications
Item
NPN
E3ZM-V6_
PNP
E3ZM-V8_
Light source (wave length)
White LED (450 to 700 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Ambient
temperature
Reversed power supply polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, Reversed output polarity protection, and mutual interference prevention
Operating -25°C to 55°C
Storage
-40°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Response time
50 μs
Degree of protection
IEC: IP67, DIN 40050-9: IP69K
Material
Case
SUS316L
Lens
PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate)
Display
PES (polyether sulfone)
Sensitivity
adjustment and
operation switch
PEEK (polyether ether ketone)
Seals
Fluoro rubber
Half mirror
RGB
lightreceiving
element
Lens
Sensing object
(with regular
reflection)
White LED
Coaxial optical system with white LED
Detergent resistant
Remote teaching
Reliable detection of standard or
semi-transparent marks at normal or high
speed
For a higher performance mark
detection solution see E3X-DAC
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
For cable connectors
see page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
67
E3X-DAC-S
Mark sensors
E3X-DAC-S high functionality mark detection
sensor
The E3X-DAC-S provides reliable mark detection for standard as well as challenging
applications. The separate sensing head setup allows the easy adaption to the
mounting requirements even when space is crucial. The remote amplifier provides
easy teaching for standard applications but also on demand full control over the detection performance for most challenging applications.
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Item
Functions
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)
NPN output
PNP output
Standard models
Timer, response speed change
E3X-DAC11-S
E3X-DAC41-S
Advanced models
Same as standard models + simultaneous determination (2 colours)
AND/OR output, remote setting
E3X-DAC21-S
E3X-DAC51-S
Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Standard models (fiber amplifier connector) *1
Timer, response speed change
E3X-DAC6-S
E3X-DAC8-S
Standard models
Advanced models
E3X-DAC1, E3X-DAC4
E3X-DAC6, E3X-DAC8
E3X-DAC2, E3X-DAC5
Connector versions
*1
Order connector separately
Specifications
Item
Light source (wave length)
White LED (420 to 700 nm)
Number of registered marks
1
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference prevention
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25° to 55°C
Storage
-30° to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
2 (simultaneous determination)
Response time Super-high-speed mode
Standard mode
Operation or reset: 60 μs
Operation or reset: 1 ms
Sensitivity setting
Teaching (one-point teaching or teaching with/without workpiece) or manual adjustment
Functions
Detection mode*1
Automode (automatic selection of C-mode or I-mode)
C-mode (RGB ratio)
I-mode (light intensity)
Mark mode (Intensity and ratio of RGB values)
Operating mode
ON for match (ON for same colour as registered colour) or ON for mismatch (ON for different colour from registered colour)
Timer function
Timer type: OFF delay, ON delay, or one-short
Timer time: 1 ms to 5 s (variable)
Control outputs
–
Output for each channel, AND output, and OR output
Remote control
–
One-point teaching, teaching with/without workpiece, zero reset, and
light emission OFF
Degree of protection
*1
Operation or reset: 120 μs
Operation or reset: 2 ms
IEC60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
For more detailed information on the detection modes see page 156
Recommended fiber heads
Sensor type
General purpose
68
Size
M6
Recommended operating distance (mm) Comment
5
Standard mark detection
Order code
E32-CC200 2M
29x25.5x11.2 mm
23x20x9 mm
M3
40-50
25-30
10
E32-L15 2M
E32-A09 2M
E32-EC31 2M + E39-EF51
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Long distance - plastic
Long distance - metal
High precision mark detection
(dia 1mm spot)
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-DAC-S
Mark sensors
Fiber amplifier connectors
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
2
Mark sensors
39,994
Easy to operate detection of challenging or
coloured registration marks.
General purpose
Detection of challenging registration marks e.g.
with texts or graphics.
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
69
E3X-DACLR
Colour sensors
Easy-Teach Colour Detection Sensor
The E3X-DACLR provides reliable and easy to set up one-touch colour verification. Up
to four colours can be identified. The separate amplifier allows mounting in easily accessible areas for operators while the small sensor head can be mounted in locations
even when space is limited.
•
•
•
•
Easy to set up one-touch colour verification for 1 to 4 colours
Model for remote teaching
Small sensor head for easy mounting even when space is tight
White LED and multi detection modes for reliable operation even for challenging
applications
Ordering information
Type
Output
Tolerance adjustment
Single colour detection
Digital colour detected out
1 to 4 colour detection
Digital colour detected out
(with bank switching)
– Object teaching (good sample) M8 4-pin pigtail
(with 30 cm PVC cable)*2
with auto-tolerance
– 2-point teaching
2 m PVC cable
(good and bad sample)
*1
*2
Connection method
Order code
PNP*1
E3X-DACLRX1P-M3J 0.3M
E3X-DACLRX4P 2M
NPN models are available. Contact your Omron representative.
Models with 2 m PVC cable or M12 pigtail connector are available. Contact your Omron representative.
Specifications (amplifier and sensing head)
Item
Single colour detection
Light source (wave length)
White LED (420 to 700 nm)
1 to 4 colour detection
Number of registered marks
1
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, output reverse polarity protection, mutual interference prevention
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25° to 55°C (amplifier)
-40° to 70°C (sensing head)
Storage
-30° to 70°C (amplifier); (without icing or condensation)
-40° to 70°C (sensing head)
1 to 4 (2 banks switchable by external input with 2 colours each)
Response time Super-high-speed mode
Standard mode
Operation or reset: 60 μs
Operation or reset: 1 ms
Functions
Operating mode
ON for match (ON for same colour as registered colour) or ON for mismatch (ON for different colour from registered colour)
Timer function
Timer type: OFF delay, ON delay, or one-short
Timer time: 1 ms to 5 s (variable)
Remote control
–
Degree of protection
General purpose
70
Operation or reset: 120 μs
Operation or reset: 2 ms
One-point teaching, teaching with/without workpiece, zero reset, and
light emission OFF
IEC60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
FQ-CLR
Colour sensors
Vision Colour Sensor with teachable
inspection area and RGB value processing
• Teachable inspection area
• Models with single colour detection or up to 32 colour and image processing tasks
• RGB or HSV values via Ethernet
2
Ordering information
Type
Output
Single colour
Digital colour detected out and/or – Object teaching (good sample) 3 m PVC cable
RGB or HSV value out (via ethernet)
with auto-tolerance
or
3 m Ethernet cable*2
– 2-point teaching
(good and bad sample)
1 to 32 colour and image processing tasks
*1
*2
*3
Tolerance adjustment
Connection method
Order code
PNP*1
FQ-CLR-V1P 3M*3
FQ-CLR-V32P 3M
NPN models are available. Contact your Omron representative.
I/O and Ethernet cables are included. Other cable lengths can be provided on request. Contact your Omron representative.
Programming device ‘Touch Finder FQ-D31’ is not included. Order separately incl. AC power supply and battery or use PC Tool to program FQ-CLR.
Programming device
Type
Order code
Touch Finder (included in FQ-CLR-V32P)*1
*1
FQ-D31
AC power supply (plug type c) for FQ-D31
FQ-AC4
Rechargeable battery for FQ-D31
FQ-BAT1
The FQ-CLR can be programmed either with the Touch Finder or via a PC using the FQ PC Tool. After programming the FQ-CLR, the programming device can be disconnected. Only one programming
device is required for programming multiple FQ-CLR. Contact your OMRON representative for FQ-CLR-V32P version without included Touch Finder.
Specifications
Item
[email protected]
Field of view
13 x 8.2 to 53 x 33 mm
Installation distance
56 to 215 mm
Ambient
temperature
Operating
0° to 50°C
Storage
-25° to 65°C (without icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
General purpose
Colour sensors
The vision colour sensor FQ-CLR provides real colour identification functionality in
combination with the flexibility and functionality of a vision sensor. The teachable
inspection area provides an easy and flexible set up. The colour processing and evaluation can be carried out by the FQ-CLR directly or the RGB and HSV values are available via Ethernet to other devices.
IEC 60529 IP67
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
71
LIGHTCURTAINS AND AREA SENSORS
Choose the accuracy you need
Objects with varying positions or heights or objects with holes can create multiple signals or stay undetected when
using single beam sensors. These objects (e.g. parcels, bikes or natural products like ham or fish) are then wrongly
classified as multiple smaller items or are not detected correctly.
Detecting these objects over their whole length or acquiring the more detailed object profile canbe realized using
multiple sensors or light curtains.
Omron offers a wide range of models with varying max detection heights, different resolutions and with digital,
analog or serial outputs to provide the best performance match fitting your application.
MEASURING LIGHTCURTAINS (ANALOG AND SERIAL I/O)
Max measuring height
2m
1m
10 cm
3 cm
72
F3EM-18 (18mm pitch)
F3EM-5 (5mm pitch)
F3EM-5 (5mm pitch)
E32 Area fibers
(analog out and single beam
evaluation)
(single beam
evaluation)
(analog out)
(with serial transmission of
received light value levels)
ZX-GT
see page 78
see page 77
see Quality Control &
Inspection Guide
cm resolution
mm resolution
µm resolution
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
LIGHTCURTAINS / AREA MONITORING (DIGITAL I/O)
Multibeam sensors (lightcurtains)
Application specific lightcurtains
3
Stacking sensors
Mounting two or more sensors next
to each other and combining the
output signals by an OR-function is
a simple way of monitoring an area.
To ensure reliable detection mutual
interference needs to be prevented.
• Pulse synchronisation function
of E3Z platform for mutual
interference prevention (R,D and
LS types)
• Amplifier timing synchronisation
(PLL) of E3X platform (all types)
E3Z
Mutual
interference
prevention by
frequency
modulation
see page 29
E32-M21
4* M3 heads
combined in
one fiber
see page 80
Multibeam sensors consist of several synchronised
senders and receivers in one housing for simplified
installation and enhanced resolution in the
monitored range.
• Wide range of models for different heights from
10 mm up to 2.1 m
• Different pitches from 5 mm to 120 mm
• Slim line or standard housing
F3ET
• up to 2.1 m
height
• 5 to 18 mm
pitch
see page 75
F3E
thin aluminium
housing
see page 76
E32 Area
• teachable
sensitivity
• area beams up
to 70 mm height
see page 77
The special purpose lightcurtains
provide the performance and
certifications required for dedicated
area monitoring applications like
elevators, machine safety, etc.
• Same mounting of safety
lightcurtains and F3ET/F3EM
for simplified machine design
and installation
• Elevator lightcurtain fulfilling
EN81-70 in thin F3E housing
Safety lightcurtains
Elevator lightcurtains
type 2, type 4
and dedicated
application
solutions
Fulfills EN81-70
see Machine Safety
Guide
see page 78
73
74
F3ET
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Lightcurtain in robust aluminium housing
The F3ET lightcurtains provide a reliable area monitoring in a robust housing. The
M12 5-pin connectors and optical synchronisation between emitter and receiver
allow a fast and simple installation without special requirements.
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
• Optical synchronisation for reliable operation without additional wiring
• Robust aluminium housing
• NPN/PNP and light on/dark on selectable
Ordering information
Detection area
(MaxM)
Pitch
Sensing
distance
Channels
Through-beam
150
5 mm
3m
30
–
–
–
F3ET-005-150
18 mm
15 m
8
–
–
–
F3ET-018-150
5 mm
3m
60
–
–
–
F3ET-005-300
18 mm
15 m
16
–
–
–
F3ET-018-300
5 mm
3m
120
–
–
–
F3ET-005-600
18 mm
15 m
32
–
–
–
F3ET-018-600
5 mm
3m
180
–
–
–
F3ET-005-900
18 mm
15 m
48
–
–
–
F3ET-018-900
18 mm
15 m
112
–
–
–
F3ET-018-2100
300
600
900
2100
*1
Connection method
5 pin
3
Order code*1
NPN/PNP
Sensor type
Light-ON / Dark-ON selectable
Lightcurtain accessories
Shape
Type
Comment
Order Code
Laser alignment kit
snap-on Laser beam generator and level
F39-TGR-LLK2-SB
Protective tube
(2 pieces per set)
for F3ET-_ -150
for F3ET-_ -300
for F3ET-_ -600
for F3ET-_ -900
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP150-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP150-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP300-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP300-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP600-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP600-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP900-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP900-018
Specifications
Through-beam
Item
F3ET-005_
F3ET-018_
Sensing distance
0 to 3 m
0 to 15 m
Vertical detection area
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 600, 900, (2000)*1
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 600, 900, 2100*2
Minimum detectable object size
10 mm
30 mm
Pitch
5 mm
18 mm
Response time
t=5 ms + 0,18 x Channels ms
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (950 nm)
Power supply voltage
24 VDC ±10%
Ambient temperature
0 to 50°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP65
Dimensions
Material
*1
*2
35 x 45 x (55 + 1.06 x MaxM) mm
Case
35 x 45 x (55 + 0.98 x MaxM) mm
Aluminium
Models with different detection ranges between 150 mm and 2000 mm are available in 50 mm intervals.
Models with different detection ranges between 150 mm and 2100 mm are available in 150 mm intervals.
For safety light curtains with
same mounting see Machine
safety Guide
For thin housing see F3E
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
For safety lightcurtains
with same mounting
see Machine Safety Guide
For cable connectors see
page 151
Material handling
Accessories
75
F3E
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Lightcurtain in thin aluminium housing
The crossing of the multiple sensor beams provides a reliable area monitoring in a
thin, easy to install housing. The thin housing makes the light curtain ideal for the
installation where space is crucial.
•
•
•
•
Thin 9 mm shape for easy design-in in elevator constructions
High ambient light immunity
Robust aluminium housing
Fulfills requirements of EN81-70 (1800 mm models) for mounting in elevators
Ordering information
Sensor type
Detection
area
Pitch
Sensing
distance
Channels
Number of
optical axis
Through-beam
200 mm
40 mm
5m
6
16
1320 mm
1800 mm
120 mm
120 mm
40 mm
*1
12
34
16
46
46
Order code*1
Potential free output
Connection method
136
–
–
5m
–
F3E-06-T1 5M

–
–
–
F3E-06-T6
–
–
5m
–
F3E-12-T1 5M

–
–
–
F3E-12-T6
–
–
5m
–
F3E-16-T1 5M

–
–
–
F3E-16-T6
–
–
5m
–
F3E-46-T1 5M

–
–
–
F3E-46-T6
Light-ON/ Dark-ON settable. Common operation is Dark-ON
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
F3E-06-T_
F3E-12-T_
F3E-16-T_
F3E-46-T_
Number of LEDs
6
12
16
46
Number of optical axes
16
34
46
136
Pitch
40 mm
120 mm
120 mm
40 mm
Vertical detection range
20 to 200 mm
20 to 1320 mm
20 to 1820 mm
Response time
max. 110 ms (signal interruption)
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (880 nm)
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC
Ambient
temperature
Operation
-20 to +60°C
Storage
-40 to +70°C
EMC conformity/standards
73/23/EWG; 89/336/EWG; 95/16/EG; EN81-1; EN81-2; EN12015; EN12016; EN61000-6-x
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP54
Dimensions
400x40.7x9 mm
Material
Case
1590x40.7x9 mm
2070x40.7x9 mm
2000x40.7x9 mm
Aluminium
For cable connectors see
page 151
General purpose
76
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Area monitoring
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Area monitoring fiber sensor heads
When mounting space is crucial or the objects are very small, the area monitoring
fibers provide a reliable object detection even when the object position varies within
the monitored range.
In combination with the window monitoring function or the serial transmission of
the received light level values of the fiber amplifiers, simple height comparison or
measuring applications can be realized.
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
• Area monitoring up to 70 mm height
• Multi-beam sensor with 4 separate heads for flexible detection points
• Standard or high flex fibers
Ordering information
Sensing height
(in mm)
*2
*1
*2
Order code*1
Sensing distance (in mm)
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
–
E32-T16
–
800
1700
E32-T16P
E32-T16PR 2M
3600
1380
2600
E32-T16W 2M
E32-T16WR 2M
–
1500
3000
–
E32-ET16WR-2 2M
–
–
2300
3500
–
E32-ET16WR-1 2M
11
1040
2000
700
1500
E32-T16J 2M
E32-T16JR 2M
4 x seperate
M3 heads
600
1300
–
–
E32-M21
–
11
–
–
150
300
–
E32-D36P1 2M
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
10
1900
4000
–
11
1200
2200
30
1840
50
–
70
3
Sensor type
Order fitting amplifier from Fiber Amplifier section
Sensing area aligned to top of housing.
Specifications
Item
Standard
E32-T16
Permissible bending radius
R25
Cut to length
Yes
High-flex
E32-M21
E32-T16J
E32-T16P
E32-T16W
E32-D36P1
E32-ET16WR-1
E32-ET16WR-2
R10
R4
R1
ABS
Brass-nickel plated
Aluminium
Polyethylene coating
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
ABS
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
Degree of protection
Stainless steel
Output 1: ON
Output 2: OFF
The two outputs of the E3X-DA-S can be used to detect two different light levels
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
E32-T16JR
E32-T16PR
E32-T16WR
ABS
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP54
IEC 60529 IP50
Output 1: ON
Output 2: ON
In combination with the twin output function of the E3X-DA-S amplifier, the diffuse reflective
area monitoring fibers can detect very small objects (e.g. needles) and a second state (e.g cover
present). The area beam compensates for position variations at high speed.
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
77
F3EM
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Measuring lightcurtain in robust aluminium
housing
The F3EM provides easy to install and set up height and profile measurement. The
analog output provides a simple overall height detection and the serial output models
provide single beam evaluation for profile measurements.
• Robust aluminium housing
• Analog output for simple height detections
• Serial output with single beam evaluation for profile measurement
Ordering information
Sensor type
Through-beam
(measuring)
Measurement Pitch*1
range (MaxM)
Sensing
distance
Channels
150
5 mm
3m
30
–
–
18 mm
15 m
8
–
–
5 mm
3m
60
–
18 mm
15 m
16
5 mm
3m
18 mm
Order code
Analog output
RS232 output*2
–
F3EM-005-150-AV
F3EM-005-150-D2
–
F3EM-018-150-AV
F3EM-018-150-D2
–
–
F3EM-005-300-AV
F3EM-005-300-D2
–
–
–
F3EM-018-300-AV
F3EM-018-300-D2
120
–
–
–
F3EM-005-600-AV
F3EM-005-600-D2
15 m
32
–
–
–
F3EM-018-600-AV
F3EM-018-600-D2
5 mm
3m
180
–
–
–
F3EM-005-900-AV
F3EM-005-900-D2
18 mm
15 m
48
–
–
–
F3EM-018-900-AV
F3EM-018-900-D2
2000
5 mm
3m
400
–
–
–
–
F3EM-005-2000-D2
2100
18 mm
15 m
112
–
–
–
F3EM-018-2100-AV
F3EM-018-2100-D2
300
600
900
*1
*2
Connection method
5 pin
Models with 7.5 mm pitch are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Models with RS485 serial output are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Lightcurtain accessories
Shape
Type
Comment
Order Code
Laser alignment kit
snap-on Laser beam generator and level
F39-TGR-LLK2-SB
Protective tube
(2 pieces per set)
for F3EM-_ -150
for F3EM-_ -300
for F3EM-_ -600
for F3EM-_ -900
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP150-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP150-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP300-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP300-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP600-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP600-018
for 5 mm resolution
F3ET-IP900-005
for 18 mm resolution
F3ET-IP900-018
For μm accuracy refer to
ZX-GT in Quality Control and
Inspection Guide
General purpose
78
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
F3EM
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Specifications
Through-beam
F3EM-005_
F3EM-018_
Sensing distance
0 to 3 m
0 to 15 m
Vertical measurement range
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 600, 900, (2000)*1
0 to MaxM mm; MaxM: 150, 300, 600, 900, 2100*2
Minimum detectable object size
10 mm
30 mm
Pitch
5 mm
18 mm
Response time
Analog output: 5 ms + 0,18 x Channels; Serial output: 4.5 ms + 0.38 x Channels at 4800 bps
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED (950 nm)
Power supply voltage
24 VDC ±10%
Ambient temperature
0 to 50°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP65
Dimensions
Material
*1
35 x 45 x (55 + 0.98 x MaxM) mm
Aluminium
Models with different measurement ranges between 150 mm and 2000 mm are available in 50 mm intervals. Please note that measurement ranges between 1000 mm and 2000 mm are only
available for serial output models.
Models with different measurement ranges between 150 mm and 2100 mm are available in 150 mm intervals.
3
*2
35 x 45 x (55 + 1.06 x MaxM) mm
Case
Lightcurtains and Area Sensors
Item
Analog output for simple height detections
Single beam evaluation for profile
measurement
Models with max measurement range from
150 mm to 2100 mm; beam resolution/pitch
of 5 mm, 7.5 mm or 18 mm.
For μm accuracy refer to
ZX-GT in Quality Control and
Inspection Guide
General purpose
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
79
FIBER OPTIC AMPLIFIERS AND SENSORS
The simplicity of high performance in challenging areas
With the easy one-nut mounting standard fiber sensor heads and the 1-button teaching amplifiers, you can
realize reliable and precise detection in seconds in even the smallest spaces.
The high resistance to frequent bending, heat, chemicals and/or vacuum of the robotic and environmental
resistant fiber sensor heads, provide longest operational lifetime in even the most challenging environments.
And for applications requiring a special or the little extra performance or functionality, our extended range of
over 500 fiber sensor heads and the high or special functionality amplifiers can provide the best matching
solution for your special application.
E32 Miniature
smaller size:
see page 86
E32 Square
Standard cylindrical fiber heads
Standard cylindrical
see page 82
square housing:
•
Easy installation and long sensor lifetime for all general applications
•
High flex fibers and 90° models for fiber breakage prevention
see page 84
Through-beam
M4
E32
Longer distance
M3
Diffuse-reflective
M6
longer distance:
1550
600
450
160
M3
see page 88
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Heat, chemical,
vacuum resistant
Robotic applications
Area monitoring
Precision
detection
Special application
E32 Environm.
resistance
E32 Robot
E32 Area monitoring
E32 Precision
E32 Special
Heat resistant up
to 400° C
see page 89-92
80
Robot fiber with
>1 Mio bending
cycles
see page 94
Area monitoring up
to 70 mm width
see page 77
Coaxial or limited
reflective models, up
to 100μm resolution,
variable focal lenses
or fine beam
Special solutions for
the detection of flat
glass, wafers, liquid
levels, labels, etc.
see page 95
see page 97
Fiber optic amplifiers and sensors
E3X-NA
4
easy potentiometer adjustment:
Easy-teach amplifier with dual or single display
E3X-HD/E3X-SD
•
Easy 1-button teaching
•
Auto-teaching during operation
•
Auto power control for long term stability
see page 99
see page 102
E3X-DA-S
high functionality:
see page 104
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
2 in 1
double amplifier
Fast response
Infrared LED
E3X-MDA
E3X-NA-F
E3X-DAH-S Infrared
AND or OR signal
comparison of 2 input
signals
see page 106
Short turn on time
of 20 μs
see page 107
Infrared LED
see page 108
81
E32 Standard cylindrical
Fiber sensor heads
Standard cylindrical fiber sensor heads
The standard cylindrical fiber optic sensor heads provide reliable object detection,
easy installation and long sensor lifetime for all general applications.
• High-flex fibers and 90° cable exit for fiber breakage prevention
• Models with hexagonal back for simplified one-nut mounting
• Sizes M3 to M6
Ordering information
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
Standard fiber
easy
easy
t
moun
t
moun
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
1400
E32-TC200 2M
E32-ET11R 2M
130
E32-TC200E 2M
E32-ET21R 2M
E32-ETC220 2M
–
–
E32-T11N 2M
E32-R21
–
550
E32-DC200 2M
E32-ED11R 2M
60
E32-D211 2M
E32-D211R 2M
100
150
E32-DC200E 2M
E32-ED21R 2M
170
350
–
E32-D11N 2M
35
100
E32-D14L 2M
E32-D14LR 2M
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
M4
800
1550
1100
M3
200
450
50
dia 4 mm
1100
1500
–
M4
–
530
M6
250
–
M6
300
600
400
M4
70
160
30
M3
70
160
M6
–
dia 6 mm
80
220
1000
For longer distances use lenses
or long distance fibers
General purpose
82
Lenses see page 109;
reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Standard cylindrical
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Standard
E32-_C200
E32-_C220
Permissible bending radius
R25
Cut to length
Yes
High Flex
E32-D14L
E32-D211
E32-R21
R10
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel
plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
Degree of protection
E32-_C200E
Stainless steel
E32-E_R
E32-D14LR
E32-D211R
E32-_11N
R1
Brass-nickel
plated
Stainless steel
Plastic (ABS)
Brass-nickel
plated
Stainless steel
Brass-nickel
plated
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
Models with hexagonal back for simple
one-nut mounting
Cable exit shifted by 90° for preventing fiber
breakage
4
Hi-flex multicore fibers for flexibility in
installation without fiber breakage
Fiber sensor heads
Item
For longer distances use lenses
or long distance fibers
General purpose
Lenses see page 109;
reflectors see page 60
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
83
E32 Square shape
Fiber sensor heads
Square shape fiber sensor heads
The fiber heads in square shaped housing provide fast and easy installation on flat
surfaces.
• Models with sensing direction in X, Y or Z axis
• 3 or 4mm thick housings for minimal height requirement
• Standard or high-flex fibers
Ordering information
Sensor type
Long
Long
Sensing distance (in mm)
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
15x8x3 /
15x10x4
800
1550
1100
15x8x3
480
950
15x8x3 /
15x9x4
480
950
13x9x4
hole
General purpose
84
hole
Size in mm
(standard /
high-flex)
Standard fiber
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
1400
E32-T15X 2M
E32-ETS10R 2M
220
450
E32-T15Y 2M
E32-T15YR 2M
1000
1300
E32-T15Z 2M
E32-ETS14R 2M
–
1000
1300
–
E32-ET15YR 2M
–
1000
1300
–
E32-ET15ZR 2M
15x10x3
300
600
180
350
E32-D15X 2M
E32-D15XR 2M
15x10x3
100
200
40
100
E32-D15Y 2M
E32-D15YR 2M
15x10x3 /
13x6x2.3
100
200
25
120
E32-D15Z 2M
E32-EDS24R 2M
24.5x10x3
–
890
1780
–
E32-A03-1 2M
21x9x2
–
340
680
–
E32-A04-1 2M
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Square shape
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Standard
High flex
E32-_15
E32-A03_
Permissible bending radius
R25
R10
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
Material
E32-A04_
E32-E
E32-_15_R
R1
-40°C to 70°C
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
Degree of protection
Brass-nickel plated
IEC 60529 IP67
Stainless steel
Aluminium
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
Precise positioning during manufacturing for
90° optics to achieve minimal tolerance
variations in optical output axis angle
4
Space saving and fast mounting without
additional brackets
Fiber sensor heads
90°
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
85
E32 Miniature
Fiber sensor heads
Miniature fiber sensor heads
The miniature fiber heads provide high accuracy in smallest spaces and reliable
detection of minute objects.
• Sizes from dia 500 μm to 3 mm
• Side view models with precision axis alignment for highest accuracy
• Bendable sleeves for precision positioning
Ordering information
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
Standard fiber
le sle
ab
Bend
able
Bend
*1
*2
eve
e
sleev
Order code
High-flex fiber
Standard fiber
High-flex fiber
1000
E32-T12 2M
E32-T12R 2M
250
E32-T22 2M
E32-T22R 2M
200
450
E32-T222 2M
E32-T222R 2M
120
250
–
E32-T223R 2M
950
220
450
E32-T14L 2M
E32-T14LR 2M
340
680
–
E32-A04 2M
–
dia 1 mm
180
250
60
100
E32-T24
E32-T24R 2M
dia 1.2 mm
800
1550
560
1000
E32-TC200B*1
E32-TC200BR*1
dia 0.9 mm
200
450
120
250
E32-TC200F*1
E32-TC200FR*1
dia 3 mm
70
160
30
60
E32-D22 2M
E32-D22R 2M
dia 2 mm
80
150
40
80
E32-D32 2M
E32-D32R 2M
dia 1.5 mm
–
30
60
–
E32-D22B 2M
dia 2 mm
30
60
15
30
E32-D24
E32-D24R 2M
dia 2.5 mm
300
600
180
350
E32-DC200B 2M*1 *2 E32-DC200BR *1 *2
dia 1.2 mm
70
160
30
60
E32-DC200F*1
E32-DC200FR*1
dia 0.8 mm
–
–
20
30
–
E32-D33 2M
dia 0.5 mm
–
–
3
6
–
E32-D331 2M
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
dia 3 mm
800
1550
560
dia 2 mm
200
450
120
dia 1.5 mm
200
450
dia 1 mm
–
dia 3 mm
480
dia 2 mm
Models with 40 mm sleeve instead of 90 mm sleeve are available by adding ’4’ to the order code at the end, e.g. E32-TC200B4
Sleeve cannot be bent
For bending accessories see
page 109
General purpose
86
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Miniature
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Standard
High-flex
E32-DC200B E32-T14L
E32-T12
E32-TC200B
Permissible bending radius
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel Stainless steel
plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
E32-D22
E32-D24
E32-A04
E32-T222
E32-DC200F
E32-TC200F E32-T22
E32-T24
E32-D32R
E32-D33
E32-D331
R10
R4
E32-D22B
R1
Brass-nickel Stainless steel
plated
PVC and
Polyethylene coating
polyethylene
IEC 60529 IP67
E32-DC200BR E32-D22R
E32-D24R
E32-T12R
E32-T222R E32-DC200FR
E32-TC200BR E32-TC200FR E32-T14LR
E32-T22R
E32-T223R
E32-T24R
Brass-nickel plated
PVC and
PVC coating
polyethylene
Stainless
steel
Polyethylene coating
IEC 60529 IP50 IEC 60529 IP67
Fiber sensor heads
Degree of protection
E32-D32
0.5 mm diameter (diffuse reflective) or 1 mm
diameter (through beam) when mounting
space is crucial
High precision fiber surface cutting and
positioning during manufacturing to achieve
minimal deviation of optical output axis angle
4
Bendable metal sleeves for precision
positioning of sensors after installation
For bending accessories see
page 109
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
87
E32 Longer distance
Fiber sensor heads
Longer distance fiber sensor heads
With built-in focal lenses the longer distance fiber heads provide enhanced
operational stability in dusty environments or long distance applications
• Sensing distance up to 20 m
• Built-in focal lens
• Sizes from dia 2 mm to M14
Ordering information
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
Order code
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
M14
14000
20000
E32-T17L
25,2x10.5x8 mm
1800
4000
E32-T14
M4
1400
2700
E32-T11L 2M
M3
720
1350
E32-TC200A 2M
dia 3 mm
1400
2600
E32-T12L 2M
dia 2 mm
400
850
E32-T22L 2M
21.5x27x10 mm
1500
22x17.5x9 mm
700
1400
E32-D16 2M
M6
400
800
E32-D11L 2M
M4
100
260
E32-D21L 2M
dia 3 mm
240
450
E32-D12 2M
E32-R16 2M
Reflector
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
E32-T17L/
E32-T14
Permissible bending radius
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Retro-reflective Diffuse-reflective
E32-T11L/
E32-T12L
E32-TC200A
E32-T22L
E32-R16
E32-D16
E32-D11L
E32-D21L
E32-D12
R10
R25
R4
R25
R10
R25
Stainless steel
ABS
Aluminium
Brass-nickel plated
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
ABS
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
Polyethylene coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP40
IEC 60529 IP67
Degree of protection
Brass-nickel plated
Stainless steel
Light
emission
approx. 60°
directional
light
Core
Core
Sheath
Sheath
Light emission of conventional fibers
Lens
Lens tube
With built-in focal lenses, longer sensing
distances can be achieved up to 5 times
longer compared to conventional sensors
For reflectors see page 60
General purpose
88
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Chemical resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Chemical resistant fiber sensor heads
The chemical resistant fibers provide long sensor lifetime in areas with frequent
cleaning, usage of chemicals and higher temperatures.
• fluoroplastic cover for highest chemical resistance
• temperature resistance up to 200°C
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
720
1350
Key feature
Order code
Fluororesin coating
E32-T11U 2M
dia 5 mm
2500
1600
400
3200
4000
800
Fluororesin cover
E32-ET11F 2M
E32-T12F
E32-T14F 2M
M6
180
350
Fluororesin coating
E32-D11U 2M
dia 7 mm
dia 6 mm
150
100
40
300
190
80
Fluororesin cover
E32-ED11F 2M
E32-D12F
E32-D14F 2M
700
1400
E32-T81F-S 2M
1400
2800
Fluororesin cover
Heat resistant to 200°C
Fluororesin cover
Heat resistant to 150°C
4
M4
Fiber sensor heads
Ordering information
dia 5 mm
E32-T51F 2M
Specifications
Item
Fluororesin coating
Full fluororesin cover
Full fluororesin cover and heat resistance
E32-T11U
E32-D11U
E32-E_11F
E32-_12F/E32-_14F
Permissible bending radius (in mm)
R1
R4
R75
R40
Cut to length
yes
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
Brass-nickel plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Fluororesin coating
Degree of protection
E32-T51F
E32-T81F-S
R10
no
-40°C to 150°C
-40°C to 200°C
Fluororesin
Glass
Fluororesin cover
IEC60529 IP67
200°C
Enhanced temperature resistant models
The fluororesin cover provides highest
chemical resistance for longest lifetime in
frequently cleaned environments like aseptic
filling in pharmaceutical applications
For more glass and wafer
detection sensors in harsh
enviroments see page 90, 92
and 97
For more chemical resistant
sensors see page 24
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Highest chemical resistance
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
89
E32 Heat resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Heat resistant fiber sensor heads
The wide range of heat resistant fibers provides long sensor lifetime with highest
protection in demanding environments
• heat resistant up to 400°C
• sizes from dia 2 mm to M6
• models for long distances or high detection accuracy
Ordering information
Sensor type
Size
Key feature
Order code
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
1800
3000
-40°C to 150°C
E32-ET51 2M
400
800
-40°C to 100°C*1, high-flex
E32-T51R 2M
360
550
-40°C to 200°C
E32-T81R-S 2M
600
900
-60°C to 350°C
E32-T61-S 2M
dia 2 mm
260
450
-40°C to 150°C
E32-T54 2M
dia 3 mm
1400
2600
-40°C to 200°C
E32-T84S-S 2M
M6
400
500
-40°C to 150°C
E32-ED51 2M
140
280
-40°C to 100°C*1, high-flex
E32-D51R 2M
90
180
-40°C to 200°C
E32-D81R-S 2M
E32-D81R 2M
90
180
-60°C to 350°C
E32-D61-S 2M
E32-D61
60
120
-40°C to 400°C
E32-D73-S 2M
E32-D73
23x20x9 mm 15 - 38
-40°C to 150°C
E32-A09H 2M
30x24x9 mm 20 - 30
-40°C to 300°C
E32-A09H2 2M
25x18x5 mm
1-5
-40°C to 300°C
E32-L64 2M
36x18x5 mm
5 - 18
M4
M4
*1
Sensing distance (in mm
For E3X-SD and E3X-DA-S
teachable amplifiers
For E3X-NA amplifier with
potentiometer adjustment
E32-L66 2M
Short term resistance. For continuous operation -40°C to 90°C
For heat resistant lenses see
page 109
General purpose
90
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Heat resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
-40°C to
150°C
-40°C to
100°C
-40°C to 150°C
-40°C to 200°C
-40°C to 300°C
-60°C to
350°C
-40°C to
400°C
E32-E_51
E32-D51R/
T51R
E32-T54
E32-_ 81_
E32-T84_
E32-A09H2
E32-_ 61_
E32-D73_
Permissible bending radius (in mm)
R35
R2
R35
R10
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Material
E32-L6_
No
Head
Brass-nickel
plated
Stainless steel
Fiber
PMMA
Acrylate resin PMMA
Sheath
Fluoro resin
Polyurethane Fluoro resin
resin
IEC 60529
IP67
IEC 60529
IP50
Degree of protection
E32-A09H
Aluminium
Stainless steel
Glass
Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel spiral coating Stainless steel
spiral coating tube
tube
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP40 IEC 60529 IP67
Fiber sensor heads
400°C
350°C
200°C
150°C
The temperature range optimised material
selection provides best application fit and
value - performance ratio.
4
Stainless steel spiral coating for flexibility
with highest mechanical protection.
For heat resistant lenses see
page 109
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
91
E32 Vacuum resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Vacuum resistant fiber sensor heads
For applications in cleanest and hot environments the vacuum resistant fibers and
connecting flanges provide long operational lifetime and vacuum integrity.
• Leakage rate of 1x10-10 Pa*m3/s max
• Heat resistance up to 200°C
• Detergent resistant fluororesin or stainless steel fiber sheath
Ordering information
Sensor
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
Temperature range
Order code
400
-40°C to 120°C
E32-T51V 1M
130
250
-40°C to 120°C
E32-T54V 1M
500
950
-60°C to 200°C
E32-T84SV 1M
-40°C to 70°C
E32-G86V-1 3M
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
M4
200
dia 3
dia 3
33x18x5.5 mm
5
Type
Size
Order code
4 channel flange
80x80x49 mm
E32-VF4
1 channel flange
96 x dia30 mm max.
E32-VF1
Flange-to-amplifier
connection fiber
2 m length
E32-T10V 2M
Flange
More solutions for the detection
of wafers see page 97
General purpose
92
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Vacuum resistant
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Fiber sensor heads
Flange-to-amplifier fiber
E32-T51V
Permissible bending radius
R30
Cut to length
No
Material
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
Glass
Sheath
Fluororesin coating
Degree of protection
–
Item
Flange
E32-T54V
E32-T84SV
E32-G86V-1
E32-T10V
R25
Yes
Stainless steel
–
PMMA
Stainless steel spiral coating
E32-VF1
Polyethylene coating
E32-VF4
1x10-10 Pa*m3/s max
Leakage rate
Ambient temperature
-25°C to 55°C
Material
Flange
Aluminium and stainless steel
Seal
Fluorocarbon rubber (viton)
Vacuum chamber
Aluminium
Atmospheric-pressure side
Fiber sensor heads
Lens unit (optional)
Amplifier unit
Fiber unit
Flange
4
The vacuum resistant fiber heads and flanges are sealed to prevent gas leakage into
vacuum areas
More solutions for the detection
of wafers see page 97
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
93
E32 Robot application
Fiber sensor heads
Robot application fiber sensor heads
For applications on frequently or fast moving parts, the robot fibers reduce the risk
of fiber breakage with a guaranteed operational life of more than 1 million bending
cycles
• Free moving multicore fibers for > 1 mio bending cycles
• Square shapes for easy surface installation
• Cylindrical sizes from dia 1.5 mm to M6
Ordering information
Sensor type
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
Order code
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
M4
720
1350
E32-T11 2M
M3
200
400
E32-T21 2M
dia 3 mm
720
1350
E32-T12B
dia 2 mm
200
400
E32-T221B
dia 1.5 mm
200
400
E32-T22B
15x18x3 mm
720
1350
E32-T15XB 2M
M6
180
350
E32-D11 2M
M4
70
140
E32-D21B 2M
M3
30
60
E32-D21 2M
dia 1.5 mm
30
60
E32-D22B 2M
15x10x3 mm
180
350
E32-D15XB 2M
Specifications
Item
Square
Cylindrical
E32-D15XB
E32-T15XB
E32-T21
Permissible bending radius
R4
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
Aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
PVC coating
Degree of protection
E32-D11
E32-T11
Brass-nickel plated
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
Guaranteed more than 1 mio bending
operations
94
E32-D21B
E32-D22B
E32-T221B
Stainless steel
free
moving
cores
General purpose
E32-D21
E32-T12B
E32-T22B
re-arranged
core structure
Free moving fiber cores prevent fiber breakage and light intensity loss when the fiber is bent.
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Precision detection
Fiber sensor heads
Precision detection fiber sensor heads
Highest precision in design and manufacturing of the fibers and focal lenses ensure
highest beam and spot accuracy allowing the detection of smallest objects and height
differences of less than 100 μm.
• Coaxial fibers with focal lenses for spot diamters of 100 μm
• Through-beam models with highly focused beam and precise optical axis
alignment
• Limited reflective models for height difference detection of less than 100 μm
Ordering information
Size
Key feature
Precise thin object detection / dia 3 mm
accurate positioning
- High precision optical axis
adjustment
- Very focused beam
dia 2 mm
Very small object detection
easy
t
moun
E3X-SD
E3X-DA-S
2000
3800
E32-T22S
890
1780
E32-A03 2M
340
680
E32-A04 2M
–
300
600
E32-CC200 2M*1
M3
Spot dia 0.5 mm
100
120
E32-EC31 2M
Spot dia 0.2 mm
17
Spot dia 0.1 mm
7
dia 3 mm
–
160
300
E32-D32L
dia 2 mm
–
80
150
E32-D32 2M*1
M6
- 90° cable exit
- Hexagonal back
170
350
E32-C11N 2M
25
50
E32-C31N 2M
E32-EC41 1M + E39-F3B
E32-EC41 1M + E39-F3A-5
Spot dia 0.5 to 3mm
8 - 25 adjustable
E32-EC31 2M + E39-EF51
Spot dia 0.5 to 1 mm
6 - 15 adjustable
E32-D32 2M + E39-F3A
Spot dia 0.1 to 0.6 mm
6 - 15 adjustable
E32-C42 1M + E39-F3A
23x20x9 mm
–
26.5±11.5
E32-A09 2M
16x18x4 mm
–
7.2±1.8
E32-L25L*1
20x20x5 mm
–
3.3
E32-L25
18x20x4 mm
Precise spot e.g. for detection of a 4±2
flat / reflective surface
E32-L24L*1
34x25x8 mm
High precision (detection accuracy 2.4
100 μm)
E32-EL24-1 2M
20.5x14x3.8 mm
Limited reflective wide beam
15
e.g. for object detection on a flat
surface
E32-L16-N 2M
dia 2 mm*2
*1
*2
Order code
M6
M3
Precision height difference
detection / flat surface
detection
Object detection in front
of background
Sensing distance
(in mm)
Fiber sensor heads
Preferred usage
4
Sensor type
A high flex cable version is available. Add ’R’ to the order code, e.g. E32-CC200R
Outer diameter of the fiber. Outer diameter of the focal lens is dia 4mm (front part)
For highest precision and
measurement see ZS in 'Quality
control & inspection guide'
General purpose
For focal lenses see page 109
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
95
E32 Precision detection
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
Through-beam
Diffuse reflective (coaxial)
E32-T22S
E32-A03
E32-A04
E32-C11N
E32-C31N
E32-CC200
Permissable
bending radius
R10
R1
R10
R4
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Limited reflective
E32-C42
E32-EL24-1
E32-D32/-D32L
E32-EC31/-EC41
E32-L24L
E32-L25L
R10
E32-L25
E32-L16
E32-A09
R25
Ambient temperature -40°C to 70°C
Material Head
Brass-nickel plated
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
PVC coating
Stainless steel Brass-nickel plated
Polyethylene coating
Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP67 IEC 60529 IP50
PVC coating
Brass nickel plated Brass-nickel Polycarbonate ABS
plated and aluminium
PVC, polyethylene and polyolefin
coating
Aluminium
Polyethylene coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP40
Receivers
Transmitter
Focused and high precision beam alignment
during manufacturing. Models available with
typical deviation of 0.1° for very precise
detections
Coaxial fibers provide an enhanced positioning and detection accuracy and allow the easy
adjustment of the focal point using adjustable focal lenses
Limited reflective fibers utilize the total
reflection on shiny surfaces to detect height
differences or objects at a pre-defined
distance.
For highest precision and
measurement see ZS in 'Quality
control & inspection guide'
General purpose
96
For focal lenses see page 109
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E32 Special application
Fiber sensor heads
Special application fiber sensor heads
For a wide range of special applications, the task optimised fiber heads provide best
fitting sensing performance and adaption to environmental requirements.
• Detection of special objects (liquids, labels on foils, etc.)
• Fiber heads optimised for special tasks (wafer mapping, flat glass, etc.)
Ordering information
Size
Sensing distance (in mm)
E3X-SD
Comment
Order code
–
E32-G14
E3X-DA-S
Fork shape
36x24x8 mm
10
Wafer mapping
dia 3 mm
2000
3800
–
E32-T22S
dia 3 mm
1400
2600
–
E32-T24S
dia 3 mm
890
1780
–
E32-A03 2M
dia 2 mm
340
680
–
E32-A04 2M
dia 6 mm
liquid contact
Liquid level contact
E32-D82F1 4M
15x23.5x5 mm
tube contact
Liquid level detection
E32-D36T 2M
through transparent tube
or container
21x16.5x4 mm
8
Metal housing
E32-A10 2M
20.5x14x3.8 mm
15
Plastic housing
E32-L16-N 2M
Glass detection
in hot environment
25x18x5 mm
1-5
Heat resistant up to 300°C E32-L64 2M
36x18x5.5 mm
5 - 18
Glass detection
in wet processes
38.5x39x17.5
8 to 20 (recommended: 11)
- Heat resistant up to 85°C E32-L11FS 2M
- Recommended usage
with 'tough mode' of
E3X-DA-S
Label detection
20x20x5 mm
7.2±1.8
–
E32-L25L
18x20x4 mm
4±2
–
E32-L24L
34x25x8 mm
2.4
Very precise spot (detec- E32-EL24-1 2M
tion accuracy 100 μm)
4
Liquid level sensor
Fiber sensor heads
Sensor type
Glass detection
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
E32-L66 2M
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
97
E32 Special application
Fiber sensor heads
Specifications
Item
E32-D82F1
E32-L11FS
E32-G14
Permissable
bending radius
R40
R25
Cut to length
Yes
Ambient temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Material
Head
PFA
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67
Item
E32-EL24-1
Permissable
bending radius
R10
Cut to length
Yes
E32-L64
ABS
PVC
Stainless steel
Glass
Stainless steel spiral coating
E32-T24S
-40°C to 70°C
Head
Brass-nickel
Stainless steel
plated and aluminium
Fiber
PMMA
Sheath
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP30
IEC 60529 IP40
IEC 60529 IP40
IEC 60529 IP50
E32-L24L
E32-L25L
E32-A04
E32-D36T
E32-A03
R4
R1
ABS
Brass-nickel plated
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
Polyethylene coating
PVC coating
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
IEC 60529 IP50
IEC 60529 IP67
Brass-nickel plated
The limited reflective fiber heads for glass detection provide a stable detection of flat glass in
standard, hot or wet environment. The shapes and materials are optimized to provide the best
value - performance ratio depending on the requirements.
98
E32-L66
-40°C to 300°C
ABS
Material
General purpose
E32-L16-N
No
Ambient temperature
Degree of protection
E32-A10
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Stainless steel
E32-T22S
For the detection of very small height
differences like labels on foils in applications
where space is crucial, the small sized limited
reflective sensors provide accurate detection
up to 100μm resolution.
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-HD
Fiber amplifier
Easy-teach digital fiber amplifier
The E3X-HD with 1-button Smart tune set-up provides fast and simple teaching. Dual
digital display and advanced features make the E3X-HD ideal even for demanding
applications.
• Easy teaching by Smart tuning within a few seconds
• Dynamic Power Control (DPC) for highest operational stability for changing
environmental conditions or challenging objects
• High signal resolution - 2.5 times higher compared to conventional models
• EtherCAT and CompoNet Communication units for high-speed field bus
connectivity
Ordering information
Order code
Communication unit model*1
Transistor output models
NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
E3X-HD11 2M
E3X-HD41 2M
–
Fiber amplifier connector
E3X-HD6
E3X-HD8
E3X-HD0
*1
Fiber amplifier
Item
For field bus connection please chose Communication unit E3X-ECT for EtherCAT or E3X-CRT for CompoNet.
Fiber amplifier connectors
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN11
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Communications method
Applicable Fiber Amplifier Units
Order code
CompoNet
E3X-HD0
E3X-MDA0
E3X-DA0-S
E3X-CRT
5
Shape
Communication units
Shape
EtherCAT
E3X-ECT
Item
Specifications
Type
Standard models
Model
E3X-HD11
Connection method
Pre-wired
Control output
NPN output
For Communications Unit
E3X-HD41
E3X-HD6
E3X-HD8
Wire-saving connector
PNP output
NPN output
Communications unit
connector
PNP output
Red, 4-element LED (625 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p)10% max.
Power consumption
Normal Mode: 720 mW max. (Current consumption: 30 mA max. at 24 VDC, 60 mA max. at 12 VDC.)
Power Saving Eco Mode: 530 mW max. (Current consumption: 22 mA max. at 24 VDC, 44 mA max. at 12 VDC.)
Control output
Load power supply voltage: 26.4 VDC max., open-collector output (Varies with the model depending on
output is PNP or NPN.)Load current: 50 mA max. (residual voltage: 2 V max.), OFF current: 0.5 mA max.
Response time
Light source (wavelength)
Super-high-speed Mode Operate or reset: 50 μs
(SHS)
High-speed Mode (HS)
Operate or reset: 250 μs
Standard Mode (STND)
Operate or reset: 1 ms
Operate or reset: 55 μs
Operate or reset: 50 μs
E3X-HD0
–
–
Operate or reset: 55 μs
Operate or reset: 50 μs
Giga-power Mode (GIGA) Operate or reset: 1 ms
Mutual interference
prevention
Possible for up to 10 units
Maximum
connectable Units
16 units
with E3X-CRT: 16 units
with E3X-ECT: 30 units
For more signal processing
functionality see E3X-DA-S
General purpose
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
99
E3X-HD
Fiber amplifier
Easy One-Button-Teaching / Smart Tuning
Setting of Smart Tuning
Easy Solution Fewer Setting Steps
E3X-HD
Conventional Model
1
Step
1
Step
Power adjustment
Smart
tuning
With workpiece Without workpiece
Power adjustment
2
Step
Threshold setting
Threshold setting
Optimum
settings
Easy Solution
Press only twice.
Optimum
settings
Incident level
adjustment
with workpiece
Incident level
adjustment
without workpiece
Threshold setting
Set to intermediate value
between the incident levels
with and without a workpiece.
(
Optimum settings for saturated and
low incident level
)
Settings are simultaneously completed.
Easy setting of optimum power and threshold by pushing tune button twice.
Smart power control
APC
Always ON
Long-term stability
Light intensity
(AUTO POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate light
intensity
Smart Power
Control
With APC
Without APC
Time
Incident level
DPC
Target value
(displayed
incident level)
(DYNAMIC POWER
CONTROL)
Automatically
compensate
incident level
Compen- Compen- Compensated. sated. sated.
Flashes when
compensation is
no longer possible.
DPC
Setting value
(threshold value)
Time
Enhanced signal stability control for compensating power reductions caused by temperature drift, dust or aging of LED.
Field bus connectivity
E3X-CRT
E3X-ECT
Field bus communication allows control by an external device to simplify setup and
reduce wiring effort.
For more signal processing
functionality see E3X-DA-S
General purpose
100
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-SD
Fiber amplifier
Single display digital fiber amplifier
E3X-SD allows easy one button setting and provide the best value performance ratio
for standard applications.
• Auto-teaching during machine operation
• 2-point teaching within a few seconds
• Simple threshold adjustment with up/down keys
Ordering information
Item
Order code
PNP output
E3X-SD21 2M
E3X-SD51 2M
Fiber amplifier connector*1
E3X-SD7
E3X-SD9
*1
Fiber amplifier
NPN output
Pre-wired
Order connector separately. For M8 connector models see E3X-DA-S.
Fiber amplifier connectors
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier connector 2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN11
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
6
Shape
Specifications
Item
E3X-SD
Light source (wave length)
Red, 4-element LED (625 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
Operation or reset: 200 μs max
Sensitivity setting
Teaching and digital up/down keys
Functions
High-speed control method for emission current
Auto power control
Mutual interference prevention Optical communication sync. possible for up to 5 units
Digital displays
Incident level or threshold
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
Easy operation by ergonomic buttons
Auto-teaching
2-point teaching
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Push the TEACH button for min. 3 seconds while objects passing
Position a workpiece and press
the TEACH button.
Remove a workpiece and press
the TEACH button.
For more signal processing
functionality see E3X-DA-S
General purpose
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
101
E3X-NA
Fiber amplifier
Digital fiber amplifier with potentiometer
adjustment
The E3X-NA is the ideal amplifier for standard fiber applications providing
quick & easy potentiometer adjustment and bargraph display.
• Easy adjustment with potentiometer
• Mutual interference prevention
• Enhanced water resistance types
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Item
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)
NPN output
PNP output
Standard
E3X-NA11 2M
E3X-NA41 2M
Enhanced water resistance
E3X-NA11V 2M
E3X-NA41V 2M
Connector version
Item
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Standard (fiber amplifier connector)*1
E3X-NA6
E3X-NA8
Enhanced water resistance
(M8 4-pin connector)
E3X-NA14V
E3X-NA44V
*1
Order connector separately.
Fiber amplifier connectors
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
30 cm PVC cable
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
For best value performance ratio
fibers see page 82
For higher switching frequency
see E3X-NA_F.
General purpose
102
For M8 cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-NA
Fiber amplifier
Specifications
Item
Output
Standard
Enhanced water resistance
NPN output
E3X-NA11, E3X-NA6
E3X-NA11V, E3X-NA14V
PNP output
E3X-NA41, E3X-NA8
E3X-NA41V, E3X-NA44V
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (625 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuit
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
Operation or reset: 200 μs max.
Sensitivity setting
8-turn endless adjuster (potentiometer)
Functions
OFF-delay timer: 40 ms (fixed)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
IEC 60529 IP66 (with protective cover attached)
Simple sensitivity adjustment by
potentiometer
6
Bargraph display with light level, switching
status and threshold indicators
Fiber amplifier
Switching status
+20%
+10%
Threshold
–10%
–20%
For best value performance ratio
fibers see page 82
For higher switching frequency
see E3X-NA_F.
General purpose
For M8 cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
103
E3X-DA-S
Fiber amplifier
High functionality digital fiber amplifier
High functionality digital fiber amplifier with advanced timing, LED power control and
signal processing functionality providing highest detection accuracy and stability
even for the most challenging objects and settings.
• Power tuning function to adjust the received light to a maximum, minimum or
pre-defined value
• Auto power and threshold adjustment functions for highest operational stability
• Two outputs for window monitoring or two level detections (e.g. object + object
state change)
Ordering information
Item
Function
Order code
Power
tuning
Timer
Auto-threshold
compensation
(ATC)
Twin output
External input Differential
operation
Wet process Power saving
NPN
'tough mode’ 'Eco' functions
(display/LED off)
PNP
Pre-wired
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
E3X-DA21-S 2M
E3X-DA51-S 2M
Fiber amplifier connector*1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - selectable
Yes
Yes
Yes
E3X-DA7-S
E3X-DA9-S
M8 connector 3 pin
Yes
Yes
*2
E3X-DA13-S
E3X-DA43-S
E3X-DA14-S
E3X-DA44-S
4 pin
*1
*2
Order fiber amplifier connector E3X-CN_ separately
For fiber amplifiers with these functions and connecting with M8 connector, contact your OMRON representative.
Specifications
Item
Pre-wired models
Fiber amplifier connector models
M8 connector models
E3X-DA_ 1-S
E3X-DA7-S, E3X-DA9-S
E3X-DA_ 3-S, E3X-DA_ 4-S
Light source (wave length) Red LED (650 nm)
Red LED (625 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ± 10%; ripple (p-p): 10% max
Protective circuits
Reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, mutual interference prevention*1
Response Super-hightime
speed mode
80 μs for operation and reset max.
55 μs for operation and reset max.
Standard mode 1 ms for operation and reset
High resolution 4 ms for operation and reset
mode
Wet process
'tough mode'
*2
16 ms for operation and reset
Sensitivity setting
Teaching and digital up/down keys
Functions Power tuning
Light emission power and reception gain, digital control method
Timer
OFF-delay, ON-delay, one-shot timer. 1 ms to 5 s (1 to 20 ms set in 1-ms increments, 20 to 200 ms set in 10-ms increments,
200 ms to 1 s set in 100-ms increments, and 1 to 5 s set in 1 s-increments)
Auto power
control (APC)
LED power monitoring and auto-control function by LED emission current adjustment.
Activethreshold
control (ATC)
Monitoring of received light average and deviation adjustment of threshold for output 1
*2
Twin output
Output 1: incident level
Output 2: incident level or alarm output
Output 1: incident level
Output 2: incident level or alarm output
(not available if external input is used)
*2
External input
External teach or function trigger (power tuning,
emitter OFF, ATC start)
External teach or function trigger (power tuning, emitter *2
OFF, ATC start) (not available if output 2 is used)
Differential
operation
Single edge or double edge detection mode
*2
Wet process
'tough mode'
Incident level triggering on floating average of received light.
*2
*2
Power saving LED: ON/OFF switchable (external input)
'Eco' functions Display: ON/ DIM / OFF selectable
Digital display
Incident level + threshold or user specific
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
*1
*2
The reverse polarity protection for the pre-wired and fiber amplifier connector models is for the power supply and the output. For M8 connector models the reverse polarity protection is for the
power supply.
For fiber amplifiers with these functions and connecting with M8 connector, contact your OMRON representative.
For advanced communication
via DeviceNet see fiber
amplifier communication unit
E3X-DRT21-S at
www.industrial.omron.eu
General purpose
104
For M8 cable connectors
see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-DA-S
Fiber amplifier
Fiber amplifier connectors
Shape
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Power tuning
Light coupling
Increase or decrease the LED power and
received light intensity to the desired
level e.g. a pre-defined value for easy
sensor malfunction detection.
Light distribution in multi- Light distribution in the
core-fibers with conven- new E3X-DA-S amplifier
generation
tional fiber amplifiers
Timer functions
OFF delay
No incident light
OFF
L-ON
ON
D-ON
D-ON
T
ON
OFF
T
No incident light
L-ON
Incident light
ON
D-ON
No incident light
T
ON
OFF
T
L-ON
ON
D-ON
T1
T2
T2
T1
ON
OFF
T
T1: ON-delay set time
T2: OFF-delay set time
T1 and T2 can be set separately.
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON delay and OFF delay
Incident light
No incident light
T
ON
L-ON
One-shot
Incident light
Incident light
Fiber amplifier
ON delay
6
Adjust the output signal length and timing
Twin output
Differential detection
The two outputs can be used to detect two different light levels
Triggering on single or double signal edges
Active-threshold control (ATC)
Without ATC: malfunction caused by
temperature drift, pollution or condensation
Received light
Threshold
without ATC
Incident level
ATC threshold
Output V
Operation with ATC
Operation without ATC
Sensor output
T/ms
Higher signal stability compensating for power
reduction caused by temperature drift, dust or
condensation.
For advanced communication
via DeviceNet see fiber
amplifier communication unit
E3X-DRT21-S at
www.industrial.omron.eu
General purpose
For M8 cable connectors
see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
105
E3X-MDA
Fiber amplifier
2-in-1 Digital fiber amplifier
E3X-MDA incorporates 2 digital fiber amplifiers in one slimline housing. For applications requiring the detection of two objects simultanously the E3X-MDA provides an
easy to use operation saving space and set-up time.
• Two digital amplifiers in one slimline housing
• Twin output models – on/off or area (between two threshold values)
• Signal comparison functions (AND, OR, etc.)
Ordering information
Item
Functions
NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
AND/OR output
E3X-MDA11
E3X-MDA41
Fiber amplifier connector*1
AND/OR output
E3X-MDA6
E3X-MDA8
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
*1
Order code
Order connector separately.
Fiber amplifier connectors
Shape
Specifications
Item
E3X-MDA
Light source (wave length)
Red LED (650 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time Super-high-speed mode
130 μs for operation and reset respectively
Standard mode
1 ms for operation and reset respectively
High-resolution mode
4 ms for operation and reset respectively
Sensitivity setting
Teaching and digital up/down keys
Functions
Power tuning
Light emission power and reception gain, digital control method
Timer function
Select from OFF-delay, ON-delay, or one-shot timer.
1 ms to 5 s (1 to 20 ms set in 1-ms increments, 20 to 200 ms set in 10-ms increments,
200 ms to 1 s set in 100-ms increments, and 1 to 5 s set in 1 s-increments)
I/O settings
Output setting (select from channel 2 output, AND, OR, leading edge sync, falling edge sync, or differential output)
Digital displays
Select from the following: Incident level for channel 1 + incident level for channel 2, Incident level + threshold, incident level percentage +
threshold, incident light peak level + no incident light bottom level, minimum incident light peak level + maximum no incident light bottom level,
long bar display, incident level + peak hold, incident level + channel
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
For advanced communication
via DeviceNet see fiber
amplifier communication unit
E3X-DRT21-S
at www.omron-industrial.com.
General purpose
106
The AND and OR functionality for the two fiber
channels allows simple signal processing
without the need for a PLC.
This allows the addition of sensor checks to
machines without reprogramming the PLC.
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
The 2 in 1 amplifier replaces two standard
amplifiers reducing space requirements and
hardware cost.
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E3X-NA_F
Fiber amplifier
Fast response digital amplifier with
potentiometer
The E3X-NA_F provides a very fast response time and is the ideal amplifier for high
speed detection applications.
• Short turn on time of only 20 μs
• Easy adjustment with potentiometer
Ordering information
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Pre-wired
E3X-NA11F
E3X-NA41F
M8 connector (4 pin)
-*1
E3X-NA44FV
*1
Fiber amplifier
Item
Contact your OMRON representative
Specifications
Item
NPN output
E3X-NA11F
-
PNP output
E3X-NA41F
E3X-NA44FV
Red LED (680 nm)
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuit
Reverse polarity protection, output short-circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Response time
Operation: 20 μs max.
Reset: 30 μs max.
Sensitivity adjustment
8-turn endless adjuster (potentiometer)
Functions
OFF-delay timer: 40 ms (fixed)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
6
Light source (wave length)
IEC 60529 IP66 (with protective cover attached)
Note: For teachable fast response fiber amplifiers with a digital display contact your OMRON representative.
For M8 cable connectors
see page 151
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
107
E3X-DAH-S
Fiber amplifier
Digital fiber amplifier with infrared LED
The digital fiber amplifiers with infrared LED are ideal for water detection applications
or where visible light is not desired.
• Infrared LED
• LED power control and signal processing function
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Item
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)
Infrared light
NPN output
PNP output
E3X-DAH11-S 2M
E3X-DAH41-S 2M
Connector version
Item
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
E3X-DAH6-S
E3X-DAH8-S
Type
Comment
Order code
Fiber amplifier
connector
2 m PVC cable
E3X-CN21
30 cm PVC cable with M12 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
30 cm PVC cable with M8 plug connector (4 pin)
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Infrared light (fiber amplifier connector)*1
*1
Order connector separately
Fiber amplifier connectors
Shape
Specifications
Amplifier units with cables
Item
NPN output
E3X-DAH11-S, E3X-DAH6-S
PNP output
E3X-DAH41-S, E3X-DAH8-S
Light source (wave length)
Infrared LED
Power supply voltage
12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, output short circuit protection, mutual interference prevention
Responce
time
Super-high- NPN
speed mode PNP
48 μs for operation and 50 μs for reset
Standard mode
1 ms for operation and reset respectively
High-resolution mode
4 ms for operation and reset respectively
53 μs for operation and 55 μs for reset
Sensitivity setting
Teaching and digital up/down keys
Functions
Power tuning
Light emission power and reception gain, digital control method
Timer function
Select from OFF-delay, ON-delay, or one-shot timer. 1 ms to 5 s (1 to 20 ms set in 1-ms increments, 20 to 200 ms set in 10-ms increments,
200 ms to 1 s set in 100-ms increments, and 1 to 5 s set in 1 s-increments)
Digital displays
Incident level + threshold or user specific
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP50 (with protective cover attached)
General purpose
108
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E39/E32
Fiber accessories
Type
Comment
Order code
Focal lens
- Extends sensing distance by more than 500%
- For M4 Through beam fibers E32-TC200, E32-ET11R, E32-T11 (fits M2.6 thread)
- 2 pcs per set
E39-F1
Focal lens (side view)
- For M4 through beam fibers E32-TC200, E32-ET11R, E32-T11,
E32-T61-S, E32-T81R-S (fits M2.6 thread)
- Temperature range -40°C to +200°C
- 2 pcs per set
E39-F2
Focal lens (variable)
- For precision detection with E32-D32, E32-EC41
E39-F3A
Focal lens
- For precision detection with E32-EC41
E39-F3A-5
- For precision detection with E32-EC41
E39-F3B
- For precision detection with M6 coaxial diffuse reflective fibers (e.g. E32-CC200)
E39-F18
Focal lens (side view, variable) - For precision detection with E32-EC31
E39-EF51
Focal lens (heat resistant)
- Extends sensing distance by more than 500%
- For M4 through beam fibers E32-ET51, E32-T61, E32-T61-S,
E32-T81R, E32-T81R-S (fits M4 thread)
- Temperature range -60°C to +350°C
- 2 pcs per set
E39-EF1-37-2
Focal lens (vacuum resistant,
heat resistant)
- Fits E32-T51V and E32-T54V (fits M2.6 thread)
- 2 units per set
- Heat resistant up to 120°C
E39-F1V
Fiber cutter
- Included in applicable fiber
E39-F4
Thin fiber attachment
- Amplifier adapter for thin fibers
- Included in applicable fiber (2 sets)
E39-F9
Sleeve bender
- For E32-TC200B(4)
- For E32-TC200F(4)
- For E32-DC200F(4)
E39-F11
Single fiber extension
connector
- Fiber extension connector for 2.2 mm dia standard fibers
- One unit
E39-F10
E39-F16
6
Shape
Fiber accessories
Accessories
Dual fiber extension connector - For fibers with dia 2.2
Protective spiral tube *1
Fiber on roll *2
*1
*2
E39-F13
- For fiber with dia 1.0
E39-F14
- For fibers with dia between 1.0 and 2.2
E39-F15
- For M3 diffuse type sensors
- Length 1 m
E39-F32A
- For M3 through beam type sensors
- Length 1 m
E39-F32B
- For M4 through beam type sensors
- Length 1 m
E39-F32C
- For M6 diffuse type sensors
- Length 1 m
E39-F32D
- Dia 2.2 mm
- Standard monocore, 10 mm bending radius
- -40°C to 80°C
E32-E01 100M
- Dia 1.1 mm
- Standard monocore, 15 mm bending radius
- -40°C to 80°C
E32-E02 100M
- Dia 2.2 mm
- High flex multicore, 1 mm bending radius
- -40°C to 80°C
E32-E01R 100M
- Dia 1.1 mm
- High flex multicore, 1 mm bending radius
- -40°C to 80°C
E32-E02R 100M
- Dia 2.2 mm
- High temperature monocore, 20 mm bending radius
- -60°C to 150°C
E32-E05 100M
Protective spiral tubes with 0.5 m length are available. Add '5' to order code…e.g. E39-F32A5
Fiber length 100 m on a roll - cut to length
For reflectors see page 60
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
109
INDUCTIVE SENSORS
For machines that Never Stop
Our inductive sensors are designed and tested to ensure a long service life and
achieve maximum machine availability even in the harshest environments.
M8
M12
Cylindrical brass housing, DC 3-wire
E2A
see page 113
M18
• Highest water resistance
• Highest electromagnetic noise immunity
(e.g. from inverters)
M30
30 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
Sn
5 mm
• Wide temperature range -40°C to 70°C
• 200mA max load current
• Wide connection range
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
DC 2-wire / DC 4-wire
Stainless steel
housing
Detergent resistant
Chemical
resistant
e1 certified
E2A DC 2 wire
E2A-S
E2EH
E2FQ
E2AU
• Cable breakage
detection
• Stock reduction for
spare parts
see page 115
110
Stainless steel
housing (SUS 303)
see page 116
High grade stainless
steel housing (SUS
316L)
Fluoro plastic (PTFE)
housing
30 V/m
electromagnetic noise
immunity certified
see page 123
see page 124
see page 125
E2EC
E2E small diameter
E2S
see page 119
see page 118
see page 121
miniature housing:
TL-W
Inductive sensors
compact square housing:
see page 120
E2A3
see page 122
see page 117
7
E2Q5
longer distance:
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Enhanced
oil resistance
Full metal housing
Precision
Positioning
All material
detection
E2E-_-U
E2FM
E2C-EDA
E2K-C
Tested oil resistance
on commonly used
lubricants
• Metal sensing face
• Compensates for
metal chip deposits
see page 126
see page 127
Typically several
hundred μm
detection precision
see page 129
Capacitive detection
up to 25 mm
distance
see DVD
111
112
E2A
Inductive sensors
Extended sensing range inductive sensor
in cylindrical brass housing
The high quality and the long-life design of the E2A extended sensing distance
provide high operational reliability, accurate performance and long sensor lifetime for
a wide range of applications.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended (double) sensing distance
IP67 and IP69k for highest water protection
DC 3-wire (NO, NC)
Wide temperature range -40°C to 70°C
200 mA max load current
Wide installation and connectivity range through modular concept
Ordering information
Pre-wired
M8
M12
M18
M30
Sensing distance
Thread length (overall Output
length)
configuration
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC

–
2.0 mm
27 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M*2
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M*2
–

4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M*2
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M*2

–
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M12KS04-WP-B2 2M
–

8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KN08-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M12KN08-WP-B2 2M

–
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KS08-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M18KS08-WP-B2 2M
–

16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KN16-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M18KN16-WP-B2 2M

–
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KS15-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M30KS15-WP-B2 2M
–

20.0 mm*3
29 (64) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KN20-WP-B1 2M
E2A-M30KN20-WP-B2 2M
Sensing distance
Thread length (overall Output
length)
configuration
Inductive sensors
Size
Connector types (M12)
M8
M12
M18
M30
*1
*2
*3
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC

–
2.0 mm
27 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1*2
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2*2
–

4.0 mm
21 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1*2
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2*2

–
4.0 mm
24 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B1
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B2
–

8.0 mm
27 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B1
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B2

–
8.0 mm
39 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B2
–

16.0 mm
29 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B1
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B2

–
15.0 mm
44 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B1
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B2
–

20.0 mm*3
29 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B1
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B2
7
Size
NPN models are available. For ordering replace '-B1' or '-B2' by '-C1' or '-C2'.
M8 sized housings are only available in stainless steel (SUS 303).
Models with longer sensing distances of 30 mm and 35 mm are available.
Optional features
Refer to complete datasheet or contact your OMRON representative for the below optional features
Sensing module and body
– single sensing distance (ideal for compatibility with previous machine generations)
– Long body (ideal for mounting through thicker constructions)
Connection
– M8 4-pin (for ordering replace -M1 by -M3 e.g. E2A-S08KS02-M3-B1)
– M8 3-pin (for ordering replace -M1 by -M5 e.g. E2A-S08KS02-M5-B1)
– PUR cable
– Pigtails with M8 or M12 plugs
Output
– 400 mA max. load current (ideal for switching higher load currents directly)
– DC 2-wire (ideal for reduced wiring; leakage current can be used to detect cable breakage)
– DC 4-wire (NO+NC output - ideal for reduced stock for spare parts; antivalent signal can be used to detect cable breakage)
(For DC 2-wire and DC 4-wire see also page 115)
For cable connectors see
page 151
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
113
E2A
Inductive sensors
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions.)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2A-S08KS
E2A-M12KS
E2A-M18KS
E2A-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm 10%
4 mm 10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
Response frequency
1,500 Hz
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor,
surge suppressor, short-circuit protection short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-40C to 70C
Storage
-40C to 85C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IP67 after IEC 60529; IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Case
Stainless steel
Sensing surface
PBT
Brass-nickel plated
High water resistance
Cable breakage protection
High resistance against temperature change
High vibration resistance
High mechanical resistance
High electro-magnetic noise immunity
For cable connectors see
page 151
General purpose
114
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2A DC 2-wire/DC 4-wire
Inductive sensors
DC 2-wire or DC 4-wire inductive sensor in
cylindrical brass housing
The performance and operational reliability of the E2A family is also available for
DC 2-wire or DC 4-wire output.
• DC 2-wire (ideal for reduced wiring; leakage current can be used to detect
cable breakage)
• DC 4-wire (NO+NC output - ideal for reduced stock for spare parts;
antivalent signal can be used to detect cable breakage)
Ordering information
Pre-wired
(For different cable materials and lengths, special housing length or special connectors, please refer to complete datasheet.)
Sensing distance
M8
M12
M18
M30
Thread length (overall length)
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
DC 2-wire (NO)*1
DC 4-wire (NO+NC-PNP models)*2

–
2.0 mm
27 (40) mm
E2A-S08KS02-WP-D1 2M
E2A-S08LS02-WP-B3 2M*3
–

4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
E2A-S08KN04-WP-D1 2M
E2A-S08LN04-WP-B3 2M*3

–
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
E2A-M12KS04-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M12KS04-WP-B3 2M
–

8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
E2A-M12KN08-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M12KN08-WP-B3 2M

–
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
E2A-M18KS08-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M18KS08-WP-B3 2M
–

16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
E2A-M18KN16-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M18KN16-WP-B3 2M

–
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
E2A-M30KS15-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M30KS15-WP-B3 2M
–

20.0 mm
29 (64) mm
E2A-M30KN20-WP-D1 2M
E2A-M30KN20-WP-B3 2M
Sensing distance
Thread length (overall length)
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Inductive sensors
Size
Connector types (M12)
DC 2-wire (NO)*1
DC 4-wire (NO+NC-PNP models)*2
M8

–
2.0 mm
27 (43) mm
E2A-S08KS02-M1G-D1
E2A-S08LS02-M3-B3*4
–

4.0 mm
21 (43) mm
E2A-S08KN04-M1G-D1
E2A-S08LN04-M3-B3*4
M12

–
4.0 mm
34 (48) mm
E2A-M12KS04-M1G-D1
E2A-M12KS04-M1-B3
–

8.0 mm
27 (48) mm
E2A-M12KN08-M1G-D1
E2A-M12KN08-M1-B3

–
8.0 mm
39 (53) mm
E2A-M18KS08-M1G-D1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-B3
–

16.0 mm
29 (53) mm
E2A-M18KN16-M1G-D1
E2A-M18KN16-M1-B3

–
15.0 mm
44 (58) mm
E2A-M30KS15-M1G-D1
E2A-M30KS15-M1-B3
–

20.0 mm
29 (58) mm
E2A-M30KN20-M1G-D1
E2A-M30KN20-M1-B3
M18
M30
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
7
Size
NC models are available. For ordering replace '-D1' by '-D2'.
NPN models are available. For ordering replace '-B3' by '-C3'.
Longer housing with thread length 49 mm and overall length 62 mm.
Models with M8 4-pin connector and thread length 49 mm and overall length 61 mm.
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2A-S08KS
E2A-M12KS
E2A-M18KS
E2A-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm 10%
4 mm 10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
Response frequency
1,500 Hz
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Surge suppressor, short-circuit protection (for DC 2-wire; DC 4-wire models have same protective circuits as DC 3-wire models [see page 114])
Ambient
temperature
Operating
40 C to 70 C
Storage
40C to 85 C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IP67 after IEC 60529; IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Stainless steel
Case
Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface PBT
For cable connectors see
page 151
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
115
E2A-S
Inductive sensors
Extended sensing range inductive sensor
in cylindrical stainless steel housing
The performance and operational reliability of the E2A family is also available in
stainless steel housing.
• stainless steel housing (SUS 303)
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Size
Sensing distance
M8
M12
M18
M30
Thread length (overall Output
length)
configuration
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC

–
2.0 mm
27 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M
–

4.0 mm
21 (40) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M

–
4.0 mm
34 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KS04-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S12KS04-WP-B2 2M
–

8.0 mm
27 (50) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KN08-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S12KN08-WP-B2 2M

–
8.0 mm
39 (59) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KS08-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S18KS08-WP-B2 2M
–

16.0 mm
29 (59) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KN16-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S18KN16-WP-B2 2M

–
15.0 mm
44 (64) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KS15-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S30KS15-WP-B2 2M
–

20.0 mm*2
29 (64) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KN20-WP-B1 2M
E2A-S30KN20-WP-B2 2M
Sensing distance
Thread length (overall Output
length)
configuration
Connector types (M12)
Size
M8
M12
M18
M30
*1
*2
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC

–
2.0 mm
27 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1
E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2
–

4.0 mm
21 (43) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1
E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2

–
4.0 mm
24 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KS04-M1-B1
E2A-S12KS04-M1-B2
–

8.0 mm
27 (48) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S12KN08-M1-B1
E2A-S12KN08-M1-B2

–
8.0 mm
39 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KS08-M1-B1
E2A-S18KS08-M1-B2
–

16.0 mm
29 (53) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S18KN16-M1-B1
E2A-S18KN16-M1-B2

–
15.0 mm
44 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KS15-M1-B1
E2A-S30KS15-M1-B2
–

20.0 mm*2
29 (58) mm
PNP*1
E2A-S30KN20-M1-B1
E2A-S30KN20-M1-B2
NPN models are available. For ordering replace '-B1' or '-B2' by '-C1' or '-C2'.
Models with longer sensing distances of 30 mm and 35 mm are available.
Specifications
(Exemplary for shielded versions)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2A-S08KS
E2A-M12KS
E2A-M18KS
E2A-M30KS
Sensing distance
2 mm 10%
4 mm 10%
8 mm10%
15 mm10%
Response frequency
1,500 Hz
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor,
surge suppressor, short-circuit protection short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-40C to 70C
Storage
-40C to 85C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IP67 after IEC 60529; IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Case
Stainless steel (SUS 303)
Sensing surface
PBT
For higher grade stainless steel
and detergent resistance
see E2EH
General purpose
116
Food, Beverage and Pharma
For stainless steel cable
connectors see page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2A3
Inductive sensors
Long (triple) distance inductive sensor in
cylindrical brass housing
The E2A3 family features an optimised sensing performance to achieve triple sensing
distance for quasi flush mounting requirements.
• Triple distance for enhanced sensor protection from mechanical damage
• IP67 and IP69k
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Size
Sensing distance

M8

M12

M18

M30
–
–
–
–
3.0 mm
6.0 mm
11.0 mm
20.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
configuration
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
27 (40) mm
PNP
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-B1 2M
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-B2 2M
NPN
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-C1 2M
E2A3-S08KS03-WP-C2 2M
PNP
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-B1 2M
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-B2 2M
NPN
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-C1 2M
E2A3-M12KS06-WP-C2 2M
PNP
E2A3-M18KS11-WP-B1 2M
E2A3-M18KS11-WP-B2 2M
NPN
E2A3-M18KS11-WP-C1 2M
E2A3-M18KS11-WP-C2 2M
PNP
E2A3-M30KS20-WP-B1 2M
E2A3-M30KS20-WP-B2 2M
NPN
E2A3-M30KS20-WP-C1 2M
E2A3-M30KS20-WP-C2 2M
Thread length
(overall length)
Output
configuration
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
27 (44) mm
PNP
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-B1
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-C1
E2A3-S08KS03-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-B1
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-C1
E2A3-M12KS06-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-B1
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-C1
E2A3-M18KS11-M1-C2
PNP
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-B1
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-B2
NPN
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-C1
E2A3-M30KS20-M1-C2
34 (50) mm
39 (60) mm
44 (65) mm
Inductive sensors
(For different cable materials and lengths, special housing length or special connectors, please refer to complete datasheet.)
Connector types (M12)
Sensing distance
7
Size

M8

M12

M18

M30
–
–
–
–
3.0 mm
6.0 mm
11.0 mm
20.0 mm
34 (49) mm
39 (54) mm
44 (59) mm
Specifications
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2A3-S08KS03
E2A3-M12KS06-
E2A3-M18KS11
E2A3-M30KS20
Sensing distance
3 mm 10%
6 mm 10%
11 mm 10%
20 mm 10%
Response frequency
700 Hz
350 Hz
250 Hz
80 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse
polarity protection, surge suppressor,
short-circuit protection
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-25to 70°C
Degree of protection
IP67 after IEC 60529; IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
Stainless steel
Sensing surface
PBT
Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit
protection
Brass-nickel plated
For longer sensing
distance see E2Q5
General purpose
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
117
E2E Small Diameter
Inductive sensors
Miniature inductive sensor in cylindrical
metal housing
The E2E Small Diameter line with housing sizes from dia 3 mm to dia 5.4 mm is part
of the E2E family and is the ideal solution where space ist crucial. The metal housing
provides high mechanical protection.
• Miniature housing sizes from dia 3 mm to dia 5.4 mm
• Stainless steel or brass housing
• 3 kHz switching frequency
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Size
Sensing distance
dia 3 mm

–
0.6 mm
dia 4 mm
Housing material
Stainless steel
0.8 mm
M5
1 mm
brass
dia 5.4 mm
Output configuration Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
PNP
E2E-CR6B1
E2E-CR6B2
NPN
E2E-CR6C1
E2E-CR6C2
PNP
E2E-CR8B1
E2E-CR8B2
NPN
E2E-CR8C1
E2E-CR8C2
PNP
E2E-X1B1
E2E-X1B2
NPN
E2E-X1C1
E2E-X1C2
PNP
E2E-C1B1
E2E-C1B2
NPN
E2E-C1C1
E2E-C1C2
Connector types (M8, 3-pin)
Size
Sensing distance
dia 4 mm

M5
–
0.8 mm
1 mm
Housing material
Stainless steel
brass
Output configuration Order code (for M8 3-pin connector types)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
PNP
E2E-CR8B1-M5
E2E-CR8B2-M5
NPN
E2E-CR8C1-M5
E2E-CR8C2-M5
PNP
E2E-X1B1-M5
E2E-X1B2-M5
NPN
E2E-X1C1-M5
E2E-X1C2-M5
Specifications
Item
3 dia.
4 dia.
M5
5.4 dia.
E2E-CR6_
E2E-CR8C_/B_
E2E-X1C_/B_
E2E-C1C_/B_
Sensing distance
0.6 mm 15%
0.8 mm 15%
1 mm 15%
Response frequency
2 kHz
3 kHz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC), ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25C to 70 C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67
Material
Stainless steel (SUS303)
Case
Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface Heat-resistant ABS
Smaller size and longer
sensing distance see E2EC
General purpose
118
For cable connectors see
page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2EC
Inductive sensors
Miniature short head inductive sensor
for demanding mounting conditions
with remote amplifier
The E2EC family features the smallest sensor heads for reliable sensing in areas
where mounting space is crucial. The miniature sizes of the sensing heads are
achieved by separating the sensing part from the amplifier. In contrast to standard
separate amplifier models the E2EC family simplifies the installation as the amplifier
is built into the cable.
• 3 mm diameter sensing head for smallest spaces
• 18 mm long ultra short M12 size housing
• Full metal housing model for highest resistance in demanding environments
Ordering information
Standard (plastic sensing surface) DC 2-wire
High protection (all metal face) DC 3-wire and DC 2-wire
Size
Size
Order code
(pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)*1
Operation mode NC
E2EC-CR8D1
E2EC-CR8D2
5.4-mm dia.
E2EC-C1R5D1
E2EC-C1R5D2
8-mm dia.
E2EC-C3D1
E2EC-C3D2
M12
E2EC-X4D1
E2EC-X4D2
*1

–
8-mm dia.

–
DC 3-wire
Operation mode NO
DC 2-wire
Operation mode NO
E2EC-MC2B1
E2EC-MC2D1
E2EC-QC2D1-M1GJ-T*2
(fluoroplastic coating)
*1
*2
Cable length from sensor head to remote amplifier is 0.4 m
Cable length from sensor head to remote amplifier is 0.4 m
The remote amplifier is equipped with a M12 plug with 30 cm cable. Cable length from sensor
head to remote amplifier is 0.5 m
Specifications
dia 3
dia 5.4
dia 8
E2EC-CR8D_
E2EC-C1R5D_
E2EC-MC
E2EC-QC
E2EC-C3D_
E2EC-X4D_
Sensing distance
0.8 mm 15%
1.5 mm 10%
2 mm 10%
3 mm 10%
4 mm 10%
Response frequency
1.5 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
Power supply voltage
(Operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC) ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge absorber, short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
M12
7
Item
-25°C to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Brass
Stainless steel (SUS303)
Brass
Sensing surface
ABS
Stainless steel (SUS303)
ABS
For miniature sizes
with built-in amplifier
see E2E small diameter
For miniature sizes
with separate amplifiers
see E2C
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Inductive sensors
Operation mode NO
3-mm dia.
Order code
(pre-wired types with 2 m cable length)*1
Material handling
Accessories
119
TL-W
Inductive sensors
Flat shape inductive sensor in compact
plastic housing
The TL-W family offers a wide range of block style inductive sensors for simple
mounting on flat surfaces. With sensing distances from 1.5 mm to 20 mm the TL-W
is the ideal solution for all standard applications.
•
•
•
•
IP67
DC 2-wire and DC 3-wire models
Sensing distances from 1.5 mm to 20 mm
Side facing sensing face
Ordering information
DC 2-wire
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
Sensing distance
31x18x10
–

Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
Operation mode normally open (NO)
Operation mode normally closed (NC)
5 mm
TL-W5MD1
TL-W5MD2
Sensing distance
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
DC 3-wire
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
25x8x5
–

PNP-NO
PNP-NC
NPN-NO
NPN-NC
1.5 mm
TL-W1R5MB1
–
TL-W1R5MC1
–
22x8x6
3 mm
TL-W3MB1
TL-W3MB2
TL-W3MC1
TL-W3MC2
31x18x10
5 mm
TL-W5MB1
TL-W5MB2
TL-W5MC1
TL-W5MC2
53x40x23
20 mm
–
–
TL-W20ME1
TL-W20ME2
5 mm
TL-W5F1
TL-W5F2
TL-W5E1
TL-W5E2
TL-W5E_/F_
TL-W20ME_

31x18x10
–
Specifications
Item
TL-W5MD_
TL-W1R5M_1
TL-W3M_ _
TL-W5M_ _
Sensing distance
5 mm ±10%
1.5 mm ±10%
3 mm ±10%
5 mm ±10%
Response frequency
500 Hz
1 kHz min.
600 Hz min.
500 Hz min.
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC) ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge absorber; shortcircuit protection
Ambient
temperature
-25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating
40 Hz min.
10 to 30 VDC with a ripple 12 to 24 VDC
(p-p) of 20% max.
(10 to 30 VDC)
ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Surge suppressor; power supply reverse polarity protection
Storage
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Heat-resistant ABS resin
Sensing
surface
Heat-resistant ABS resin
General purpose
120
20 mm ±10%
300 Hz min.
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Diecast aluminum
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Heat-resistant ABS resin
Accessories
E2S
Inductive sensors
Miniature square inductive sensor in
plastic housing
The E2S family features miniature block style plastic housings for simple mounting
on flat surfaces. The durable plastic housing with front or side facing sensing
surfaces, provide best value-performance ratio for machine part movement
detection.
•
•
•
•
Miniature housing
Front and side facing sensing faces
Models with simple one-screw mounting
IP67
Ordering information
DC 2-wire
19x6x6
Sensing distance Sensing face

–
23x8x8
1.6 mm
2.5 mm
Order code (pre-wired types with 1 m cable length)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC

–
E2S-W11 1M
E2S-W12 1M
–

E2S-Q11 1M
E2S-Q12 1M

–
E2S-W21 1M
E2S-W22 1M
–

E2S-Q21 1M
E2S-Q22 1M
Output
specifications
Order code (pre-wired types with 1m cable length)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
NPN
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
19x6x6
Sensing distance Sensing face
–

27x8x8
1.6 mm
2.5 mm
19x6x6
1.6 mm
23x8x8
2.5 mm

–
E2S-W13 1M
E2S-W14 1M
–

E2S-Q13 1M
E2S-Q14 1M

–
E2S-W23 1M
E2S-W24 1M
–

E2S-Q23 1M
E2S-Q24 1M

–
E2S-W15 1M
E2S-W16 1M
–

E2S-Q15 1M
E2S-Q16 1M

–
E2S-W25 1M
E2S-W26 1M
–

E2S-Q25 1M
E2S-Q26 1M
PNP
7
DC 3-wire
Specifications
Item
E2S-W1
E2S-Q1
E2S-W2
E2S-Q2
Sensing distance
1.6 mm ±10%
2.5 mm ±15%
Response frequency
1 kHz min.
Power supply voltage (operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC), ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge suppressor; power supply reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature
Operating
-25 to 70°C
Storage
-40 to 85°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IEC60529 IP67
Case
Polyarylate
For the detection of non-metallic
machine parts see limit switches
/ mechanical sensors on
page 130
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Inductive sensors
Size in mm
(HxWxD)
Accessories
121
E2Q5
Inductive sensors
Long distance inductive proximity sensor in
plastic housing
The long sensing distance and simple installation on flat surfaces make the E2Q5
ideal for the detection of large metal objects for example in automotive assembly lines.
• M12 Plug-in connection
• Integrated short circuit and reverse polarity protection
• Sensing face positioning: Y-axis 15°, X-axis 90° increments
Ordering information
Connector types (M12)
Size in mm
(HxWxD)

67x40x40
–

–
Sensing distance
Sensing face
Output
Order code (for M12 connector types)
configuration Operation mode NO
Operation mode NO + NC
20 mm
Changeable
NPN
E2Q5-N20E1-M1
E2Q5-N20E3-M1
PNP
E2Q5-N20F1-M1
E2Q5-N20F3-M1
NPN
E2Q5-N40ME1-M1
E2Q5-N40ME3-M1
PNP
E2Q5-N40MF1-M1
E2Q5-N40MF3-M1
40 mm
Specifications
Item
E2Q5-N20 _ _ - M1
E2Q5-N40M _ 3- M1
Sensing distance
20 mm±10%
40 mm±10%
Response frequency
150 Hz
Power supply voltage
10 to 30 VDC
Protective circuits
Output reverse polarity protection, short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 to 85°C
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP 67; IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Case
PBT
Sensing face
PBT
For other solutions in automotive
assembly lines see page 12
General purpose
122
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
For cable connectors see
page 151
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2EH
Inductive sensors
Heat and detergent resistant inductive
sensor in cylindrical stainless steel housing
The heat and detergent resistant inductive sensors allow reliable metal object or
machine part detection in demanding environments such as food processing.
•
•
•
•
Temperature resistant up to 120°C
SUS316L housing with heat resistant plastic sensing face
IP69k for highest water resistance
ECOLAB tested and certified detergent resistance
Ordering information
Size
Sensing distance
Output
configuration
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m heat resistant PVC cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
PNP
E2EH-X3B1 2M
E2EH-X3B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X3C1 2M
E2EH-X3C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X3D1 2M
E2EH-X3D2 2M
PNP
E2EH-X7B1 2M
E2EH-X7B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X7C1 2M
E2EH-X7C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X7D1 2M
E2EH-X7D2 2M
PNP
E2EH-X12B1 2M
E2EH-X12B2 2M
NPN
E2EH-X12C1 2M
E2EH-X12C2 2M
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X12D1 2M
E2EH-X12D2 2M
Sensing distance
Output
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
3 mm
PNP
E2EH-X3B1-M1
E2EH-X3B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X3C1-M1
E2EH-X3C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X3D1-M1G
E2EH-X3D2-M1G
PNP
E2EH-X7B1-M1
E2EH-X7B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X7C1-M1
E2EH-X7C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X7D1-M1G
E2EH-X7D2-M1G
PNP
E2EH-X12B1-M1
E2EH-X12B2-M1
NPN
E2EH-X12C1-M1
E2EH-X12C2-M1
DC 2-wire
E2EH-X12D1-M1G
E2EH-X12D2-M1G
M12
M18
M30
E2EH-X3_ _
E2EH-X7_ _
E2EH-X12_ _
Sensing distance
3 mm±10%
7 mm±10%
12 mm±10%
Response frequency (average)
500 Hz
300 Hz
100 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage range)
12 to 24 VDC, ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC) (24 VDC max. at 100°C or higher)
Protective circuits
Surge suppression, short circuit protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, output reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature*1
DC 3-wire models: 0 to 100°C (0 to 120°C for 1,000 hours), DC 2-wire models: 0 to 100°C (0 to 110°C for 1,000 hours)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67, IP69k after DIN 40050-9
Material
Case, clamping nuts
Stainless steel (SUS316L)
Sensing surface
PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Cable
Heat-resistant PVC

M12
–
3 mm
M18
7 mm
M30
12 mm
Inductive sensors
Pre-wired
Size

M12
–
M18
7 mm
M30
12 mm
7
Connector types (M12)
Specifications
Item
*1
Operation with power supplied for 1,000 h has been verified at 120°C for DC 3-wire models and at 110°C for DC 2-wire models. Do not bend the cable repeatedly at 100°C or higher.
120°C
Enhanced temperature resistance
Enhanced detergent resistance
For more stainless steel sensors
see page 24
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
For heat resistant cable
connectors see page 151
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
123
E2FQ
Inductive sensors
Chemical resistant inductive sensor in
cylindrical PTFE housing
The E2FQ features a full-body fluoro plastic housing for chemical resistance
(e.g. against cleaning agents used in the semiconductor industry).
• Full body fluoro plastic housing for chemical resistance
• DC 2-wire and DC 3-wire models
Ordering information
DC 2-wire (pre-wired)
Size

M12
–
Sensing distance
Order code*1 (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
2 mm
E2FQ-X2D1
M18
5 mm
E2FQ-X5D1
M30
10 mm
E2FQ-X10D1
Sensing distance
Order code*1 (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
DC 3-wire (pre-wired)
Size

M12
NPN
2 mm
E2FQ-X2F1
E2FQ-X2E1
M18
5 mm
E2FQ-X5F1
E2FQ-X5E1
M30
10 mm
E2FQ-X10F1
E2FQ-X10E1
M12
M18
M30
E2FQ-X2_
E2FQ-X5_
E2FQ-X10_
Sensing distance
2 mm ±10%
5 mm ±10%
10 mm ±10%
Response frequency
E1, F1 models: 1.5 kHz
D1 models: 800 Hz
E1, F1 models: 600 Hz,
D1 models: 500 Hz
E1, F1 models: 400 Hz,
D1 models: 300 Hz
Power supply voltage
(Operating voltage)
E1, F1 models: 12 to 24 VDC, ripple (p-p) : 10% max., (10 to 30 VDC)
D1 models: 12 to 24 VDC, ripple (p-p) : 20% max., (10 to 36 VDC)
Protective circuits
D1 models: surge suppressor
E1, F1 models: power supply, reverse polarity protection, short circuit protection, surge suppressor
*1
–
PNP
Operation mode normally open (NO)
Specifications
Item
Ambient temperature
Operating
-25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage
Degree of protection
Material
IEC60529 IP67
Case
PTFE
Sensing surface
PTFE
High chemical resistance
For chemical resistant sensors
in smaller housing see page 24
General purpose
124
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2AU
Inductive sensors
Inductive sensor for mobile usage in
cylindrical brass housing
Designed and tested to keep your mobile machines moving.
•
•
•
•
IP69k tested and certified for highest water resistance
e1 type approval (according to Automotive Directive 2005/83/EC)
E1 type approval (according to vehicle regulation ECE-R10)
Cable or connector breakage protection
Ordering information
Pre-wired
Sensing distance

M12

M18

M30
*1
–
–
–
4.0 mm
8.0 mm
15.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
Output configuration
34 mm (50 mm)
56 mm (72 mm)
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)*1
Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
PNP
E2AU-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M12KS04-WP-B2 2M
PNP
E2AU-M12LS04-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M12LS04-WP-B2 2M
39 mm (59 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18KS08-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M18KS08-WP-B2 2M
61 mm (81 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18LS08-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M18LS08-WP-B2 2M
44 mm (64 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30KS15-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M30KS15-WP-B2 2M
66 mm (86 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30LS15-WP-B1 2M
E2AU-M30LS15-WP-B2 2M
Inductive sensors
Size
NPN types and pre-wired types with PUR cable are available. Contact your OMRON representative
Connector types (M12)
Sensing distance

M12

M18

M30
–
–
–
4.0 mm
8.0 mm
15.0 mm
Thread length
(overall length)
Output configuration
34 mm (48 mm)
56 mm (70 mm)
Order code (for M12 connector types)
Operation mode: NO
Operation mode: NC
PNP
E2AU-M12KS04-M1-B1
E2AU-M12KS04-M1-B2
PNP
E2AU-M12LS04-M1-B1
E2AU-M12LS04-M1-B2
39 mm (53 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18KS08-M1-B1
E2AU-M18KS08-M1-B2
61 mm (75 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M18LS08-M1-B1
E2AU-M18LS08-M1-B2
44 mm (58 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30KS15-M1-B1
E2AU-M30KS15-M1-B2
66 mm (80 mm)
PNP
E2AU-M30LS15-M1-B1
E2AU-M30LS15-M1-B2
7
Size
Specifications
Item
M12
M18
M30
E2AU-M12_
E2AU-M18_
E2AU-M30_
Sensing distance
4 mm 10%
8 mm 10%
15 mm 10%
Response frequency
1,000 Hz
500 Hz
250 Hz
Power supply voltage (operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max.(10 to 32 VDC)
Protective circuits
Output reverse polarity protection, power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit protection
Ambient temperature
Operating
-40 to 70°C
Storage
-40 to 85°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
Material
IP67 after IEC 60529, IP69K after DIN 40050 part 9
Case
Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface
PBT
e1
High electro-magnetic noise immunity (fields and cable induced)
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
e1 type approval after 2005/83/EC
Automotive
Semiconductor
E1
E1 type approval after ECE-R10
Material handling
Accessories
125
E2E-_-U
Inductive sensors
Oil resistant inductive sensor in cylindrical
brass housing
The E2E-_-U offers tested oil resistance on commonly used oils in the automotive
industry for reliable long-life operation in automotive assembly lines.
• Oil resistant PUR cable
• M8, M12, M18 and M30 standard sizes
• IP67g (water and oil resistance)
Ordering information
DC 2-wire (pre-wired)
Size
Sensing distance

M8
–
Order code (for pre-wired types with 2 m PUR cable)
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2 mm
E2E-X2D1-U
E2E-X2D2-U
M12
3 mm
E2E-X3D1-U
E2E-X3D2-U
M18
7 mm
E2E-X7D1-U
E2E-X7D2-U
M30
10 mm
E2E-X10D1-U
E2E-X10D2-U
DC 2-wire (pre-wired with M12)
Size
Sensing distance

M8
–
Order code (for pre-wired types with 30 cm PUR cable and M12 plug))
Operation mode NO
Operation mode NC
2 mm
E2E-X2D1-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
E2E-X2D2-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
M12
3 mm
E2E-X3D1-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
E2E-X3D2-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
M18
7 mm
E2E-X7D1-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
E2E-X7D2-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
M30
10 mm
E2E-X10D1-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
E2E-X10D2-M1TGJ-U 0.3M
Specifications
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2E-X2D_
E2E-X3D_
E2E-X7D_
E2E-X10D_
Sensing distance
2 mm 10%
3 mm 10%
7 mm 10%
10 mm 10%
Response frequency
1.5 kHz
1.0 kHz
0.5 kHz
0.4 kHz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC), ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
Surge suppressor, output short-circuit protection (for control and diagnostic output)
Ambient
temperature
Operating
-25 C to 70 C
Storage
-40 C to 85 C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC 60529 IP67 (JEM standard IP67g (waterproof and oil-proof))
Material
Stainless steel (SUS303)
Case
Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
Cable
PUR for jacket, PE
For more oil resistant sensors
see page 24
General purpose
126
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
For oil resistant cable connectors
see page 151
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2FM
Inductive sensors
Inductive sensor in cylindrical full metal
housing (case + sensing face)
The high durability stainless steel sensing face provides more than 20 times longer
protection against mechanical damage than conventional sensors. The high mineral
oil and coolant resistance and the immunity against small metal chips on the surface
make this sensor ideal for metal cutting or drilling applications.
• Full body stainless steel housing for highest mechanical protection
• Low frequency modulation for metal chip immunity
• Flame retardant cable for high protection against welding spatter damage (pigtail
models)
Ordering information
Size
M8

–
Sensing distance
Order code*1
(for pre-wired types with 30 cm PVC cable and M12 plug)
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5D1-M1TGJ
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2D1-M1TGJ
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5D1-M1TGJ
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10D1-M1TGJ
Inductive sensors
DC 2-wire (with M12 pigtail connector)
DC 3-wire, M12 Connector types
Order code*1
(for M12 connector types)
Sensing distance
PNP
NPN
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5B1-M1
E2FM-X1R5C1-M1
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2B1-M1
E2FM-X2C1-M1
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5B1-M1
E2FM-X5C1-M1
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10B1-M1
E2FM-X10C1-M1
Sensing distance
Order code*1
(for pre-wired types with 2 m PVC cable)
M8

–
7
Size
DC 3-wire, pre-wired types
Size
M8

NPN
1.5 mm
E2FM-X1R5B1 2M
E2FM-X1R5C1 2M
M12
2 mm
E2FM-X2B1 2M
E2FM-X2C1 2M
M18
5 mm
E2FM-X5B1 2M
E2FM-X5C1 2M
M30
10 mm
E2FM-X10B1 2M
E2FM-X10C1 2M
*1
–
PNP
Output configuration normally open (NO)
For more solutions in tooling and
assembly machines for
automotive parts see page 12
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
127
E2FM
Inductive sensors
Specifications)
Item
M8
M12
M18
M30
E2FM-X1R5
E2FM-X2
E2FM-X5
E2FM-X10
Sensing distance
1.5 mm±10%
2 mm±10%
5 mm±10%
10 mm±10%
Response frequency
200 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
50 Hz
Power supply voltage
(operating voltage range)
12 to 24 VDC (10 to 30 VDC), ripple (p-p): 10% max.
Protective circuits
E2FM-_D1: Surge suppressor, output short-circuit protection
E2FM-_B1/C1: Output reverse polarity protection (not E2FM-X1R5B1-M1), power supply reverse polarity protection, surge suppressor, short-circuit protection
Ambient
temperature
-25°C to +70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating
Storage
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67, IP69k after DIN 40050 part 9
Material
Stainless steel (SUS303)
Case
Sensing surface Stainless steel (SUS303)
Cable
PVC (flame retardant)
0.8
0.2
E2FM extra strong sensing face
Conventional metal face product
No interference by small metal chips on
sensing surface
Cable resistant to welding spatter
For more solutions in tooling and
assembly machines for
automotive parts see page 12
General purpose
128
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E2C-EDA
Inductive sensors
High precision positioning inductive
proximity sensor with seperate amplifier
The separate amplifier inductive sensor family E2C-EDA offers high precision
distance positioning and detection. The teach-in function allows simple installation,
and with the window function (2 outputs) production tolerance checks can easily be
set up and modified.
• Typically several hundred μm detection precision
• Precision distance teaching
• Window function (2 outputs) for production tolerance checks
Ordering information
Appearance
Sensing distance
Repeat accuracy
Order code
0.6 mm
1 μm
E2C-EDR6-F
5.4 dia.18
1 mm
1 μm
E2C-ED01*1
8 dia.22
2 mm
2 μm
E2C-ED02*1
Screw
M1022
2 mm
2 μm
E2C-EM02*1
Flat
30144.8
5 mm
2 μm
E2C-EV05*1
Screw
M1846.3
–

7 mm
5 μm
E2C-EM07M*1
Screw (heat
resistant)
M1222

–
2 mm
2 μm
E2C-EM02H

3 dia.18
–
7
Cylindrical
Inductive sensors
Sensor heads
*1
For models with cut-to-length cables add '-F' for example E2C-ED01-F
For models with protective stainless steel spiral tubes add '-S' for example E2C-ED01-S
Amplifier units with connectors*1
Amplifier units with cables
Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Item
Functions
Order code
NPN output
PNP output
Twin-output
models
Area output, open
circuit detection,
differential operation
E2C-EDA11
E2C-EDA41
Twin-output
models
Area output, open
circuit detection,
differential operation
E2C-EDA6
E2C-EDA8
External-input models
Remote setting,
differential operation
E2C-EDA21
E2C-EDA51
External-input models Remote setting,
differential operation
E2C-EDA7
E2C-EDA9
*1
Order fitting connector (E3X-CN21_) separately from accessories.
Specifications
Sensor heads
Item
3 dia.
5.4 dia.
8 dia.
M10
M18
30144.8 mm
M12
E2C-EDR6-F
E2C-ED01(-_ )
E2C-ED02(-_ )
E2C-EM02(-_ )
E2C-EM07(-_ )
E2C-EV05(-_ )
E2C-EM02H
Ambient
Operating
temperature Storage
-10°C to 60°C (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC60529 IP67
Material
Case
Brass
Sensing
surface
Heat-resistant ABS
-10°C to 200°C
IEC60529 IP60
Stainless steel
Brass
Zinc
Brass
PEEK
Note: For amplifier specifications refer to complete datashee
Higher precision and
measurement see ZX-E in
'Quality control & Inspection
guide'
General purpose
For fiber amplifier connectors
see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
129
LIMIT SWITCHES / MECHANICAL SENSORS
The reliable and flexible way to stop your machines
For the detection of machine part movement especially for the detection of end positions, the mechanical
and optical limit switches provide accurate and reliable operation with a large variety of actuation
possibilities optimized for a widest range of application and usage requirements. The easy positioning and
intuitive installation, the high immunity to changing environmental influences (electromagnetic fields,
sunlight, temperatures, etc.) as well as the possibility to directly switch loads with up to 15A make these
sensors ideal for a wide range of conveying and handling applications.
see page 132
D4N Limit switch
• Wide range of actuators (plunger, lever)
• One family suitable for standard and safety applications (direct opening mechanism and TÜV approved)
• M12 connector or terminal block with M20 conduit
• Up to 10A switching capacity
• Plastic housing
• IP67
• -30° to 70°C operating temperature range
SPECIAL MODELS
Extended temperature
range
Ultra long
mechanical life
High precision multi
direction detection
Highest precision
tactile measurement
mA
WL-_-T, TZ, D4B
Models from -40° up
to 400°C
see page 142, 134
130
D4B-_1, WLM
up to 30 Mio
mechanical
operations guaranteed
see page 134
D5B
• X, Y, Z action
• Several μm
switching accuracy
• M5, M8, M10 sizes
see DVD for more
information
ZX-T
Measurement
resolution up to
0.1μm
see Quality Control &
Inspection Guide
Extended safety limit
switch range
Electrical load
variations
A
X, D4E, ZC, D4C, Z
• Microloads
(1mA - 100mA)
• High current at high
voltage switching
(10A at 125VDC)
• Double circuit
switching
Contact your Omron
representative
D4 Safety
• Mechanical form
lock
• Manual reset
• Door hinge
switches
see Machine Safety
Guide
Z
EE-SX
see page 140
see page 58
D4C
ZC
see page 136
see page 138
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Cost efficient basic housing for subassemblies:
Compact metal housing:
D4B
Metal housing:
8
see page 134
SPECIAL MODELS
Mounting shape and
pitch variations
Connection and wiring
variations
WL, HL, D4MC, etc.
D4E, SHL, WL
• mounting shapes and pitches
popular in different countries in
the world
• mounting pitch variations (base
mounting, diagonal pitches,...)
• alternative actuator positions
Contact your Omron
representative
• Screw conduit variations
(PG13.5, G1/2, 1/2"14NPT)
• Cable exit variations (pigtails,
rubber snap on covers, screw on
covers, with or without cable
breakage protection for different
cable diameters)
Contact your Omron
representative
131
D4N
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Limit switch with plastic housing
The D4N series of limit switches in plastic housing is the ideal switch for all standard
mechanical position detection applications both for safety and non-safety
applications.
•
•
•
•
Direct opening mechanism and approval by notified body
Rugged plastic housing with double insulation
Wide range of actuators
M12 connectors or terminal block with M20 conduit
Full size
Ordering information
Actuator type
Connection method
Compact
Basic housing
Special
Order code*1
1NC/1NO (snap-action)
1NC/1NO (slow-action)
2NC (slow-action)
2NC/1NO (slow-action)
Order code
Order code
Order code
Order code
Roller lever
(resin lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-4120
D4N-4A20
D4N-4B20
D4N-4C20
M12 connector
D4N-9120
D4N-9A20
D4N-9B20
–
Plunger
M20
D4N-4131
D4N-4A31
D4N-4B31
–
M12 connector
D4N-9131
D4N-9A31
D4N-9B31
–
M20
D4N-4132
D4N-4A32
D4N-4B32
D4N-4C32
M12 connector
D4N-9132
D4N-9A32
D4N-9B32
–
M20
D4N-4162
D4N-4A62
D4N-4B62
D4N-4C62
Roller plunger
One-way roller arm lever (horizontal)
M12 connector
D4N-9162
D4N-9A62
D4N-9B62
–
One-way roller arm lever (vertical)
M20
D4N-4172
D4N-4A72
D4N-4B72
–
Adjustable roller lever, form lock
(metal lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-412G
D4N-4A2G
D4N-4B2G
–
M12 connector
D4N-912G
D4N-9A2G
D4N-9B2G
–
Adjustable roller lever, form lock
(metal lever, rubber roller)
M20
D4N-412H
D4N-4A2H
D4N-4B2H
–
M12 connector
D4N-912H
D4N-9A2H
D4N-9B2H
–
Switches with MBB contacts
MBB (Make Before Break) contacts have an overlapping structure, so that before the normally closed (NC) contact opens the normally open (NO) contact closes.
Actuator type
Connection method
1NC/1NO (slow-action)
2NC/1NO (slow-action)
Roller lever
(resin lever, resin roller)
M20
D4N-4E20
D4N-4F20
M12 connector
D4N-9E20
–
Roller plunger
M20
D4N-4E32
D4N-4F32
M12 connector
D4N-9E32
–
M20
D4N-4E62
D4N-4F62
M12 connector
D4N-9E62
–
One-way roller arm lever (horizontal)
*1
Order code*1
The NC contacts provide the approved direct opening mechanism.
For safe control systems see
MACHINE SAFETY GUIDE
General purpose
132
For M12 cable connectors
see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
D4N
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Specifications
Durability*1
Operating speed
Mechanical
15,000,000 operations min.*2
Electrical
500,000 operations min. for a resistive load of 3 A at 250 VAC
300,000 operations min. for a resistive load of 10 A at 250 VAC
Roller lever
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
30 operations/minute max.
Minimum applicable load
Resistive load of 1 mA at 5 VDC (N-level reference value)
Protection against electric shock
Class II (double insulation)
Pollution degree (operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Contact gap
Snap-action: 2x0.5 mm min
Slow-action: 2x2 mm min
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Rated open thermal current (Ith)
10 A (EN60947-5-1)
Ambient temperature
-30C to 70C with no icing
Operating
Degree of protection
*1
*2
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The durability is acquired for an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%.
10,000,000 operations min. for fork lever actuator.
1NO/1NC Contact (Snap-action)
If metal deposition between mating contacts occurs on the NC contact side, they can
be pulled apart by the shearing force and tensile force generated when part B of the
1. When metal deposition occurs.
safety cam or plunger engages part A of the movable contact blade. When the safety
cam or plunger is moved in the direction of the arrow, the Limit Switch releases.
3. When contacts are completely pulled apart.
2. When contacts are being pulled apart.
Movable contact
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Safety cam directly
pushes up the movable
contact blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
1NC/1NO Contact (Slow-action)
2NC Contact (Slow-action)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Plunger
Movable contact
Plunger
Return spring
8
Return spring
Fixed contact (NO)
NC contacts conform to EN60947-5-1 Direct Opening
When metal deposition occurs, the contacts are separated from each other by the plunger
being pushed in.
is marked on the product to indicate approval of direct opening.
For safe control systems see
MACHINE SAFETY GUIDE
General purpose
For M12 cable connectors
see page 151
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
133
D4B
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Limit switch with metal housing
The D4B series of limit switches in a rugged metal housing is suitable for both safety
and non-safety applications due to its direct opening mechanism and TÜV approval.
Furthermore with the increased temperature range and enhanced mechanical switching
lifetime, the D4B is first choice for all applications from standard to demanding
environments and for highest flexibility in mounting and connectivity preferences.
• Direct opening mechanism and approval by notified body
• Rugged metal housing and extended mechanical switching lifetime
(snap action models)
• Terminal block for direct wiring
Full size
Ordering information
Actuator type
Connection method
Special
Basic housing
Compact
Order code*1
1NC/1NO (snap-action)
1NC/1NO (slow-action)
2NC (slow-action)
D4B-4111N
D4B-4511N
D4B-4A11N
Adjustable roller lever
D4B-4116N
D4B-4516N
D4B-4A16N
Adjustable rod lever
D4B-4117N
D4B-4517N
D4B-4A17N
Plain
D4B-4170N
D4B-4570N
D4B-4A70N
Roller
D4B-4171N
D4B-4571N
D4B-4A71N
Coil spring
D4B-4181N*4
–
–
Plastic rod
D4B-4187N*4
–
–
Roller lever*2
Terminal block with
M20 conduit*3
*1
The NC contacts provide the approved direct opening mechanism.
*2
*3
*4
For models with stainless steel rollers and temperature resistance of -40°C refer to WL-_-TC.
Models with G1/2 or 1/2"14NPT conduit are available. For ordering refer to complete datasheet. For PG13.5 conduit models for non-safety applications contact your OMRON representative.
No direct opening mechanism.
Specifications
Item
Durability*1
Snap-action
Slow-action
Mechanical
30,000,000 operations min.
10,000,000 operations min.
Electrical
500,000 operations min. (at a 250 VAC, 10 A resistive load)
Operating speed
Operating frequency
1 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Contact resistance
25 m max. (initial value)
Pollution degree (operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current (Ith)
20 A (EN60947-5-1)
Protection against electric shock
Class I (with ground terminal)
Ambient temperature
-40 to 80°C (with no icing)*2
Degree of protection
*1
*2
Operating
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
The values are acquired for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35°C and an ambient humidity of 40 to 70%.
-25 to 80°C for the flexible-rod actuator.
For safe control systems see
MACHINE SAFETY GUIDE
General purpose
134
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
D4B
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
1NO/1NC Contact (Snap-action)
If metal deposition between mating contacts occurs on the NC contact side, they can
be pulled apart by the shearing force and tensile force generated when part B of the
1. When metal deposition occurs.
safety cam or plunger engages part A of the movable contact blade. When the safety
cam or plunger is moved in the direction of the arrow, the Limit Switch releases.
3. When contacts are completely pulled apart.
2. When contacts are being pulled apart.
Movable contact
Safety cam directly
pushes up the movable
contact blade.
Movable contact
blade
Plunger
Safety cam
Fixed contact (NC)
1NC/1NO Contact (Slow-action)
2NC Contact (Slow-action)
Fixed contact (NC)
Fixed contact (NC)
Contact spring
Contact spring
Movable contact
Plunger
Movable contact
Plunger
Return spring
Return spring
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Fixed contact (NO)
NC contacts conform to EN60947-5-1 Direct Opening
When metal deposition occurs, the contacts are separated from each other by the plunger
being pushed in.
8
is marked on the product to indicate approval of direct opening.
For safe control systems see
MACHINE SAFETY GUIDE
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
135
D4C
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Compact limit switch in metal housing
The 16 mm flat and compact size make the D4C range of limit switches very popular
for all standard applications but especially where mounting space is limited or protruding housings may interfere with machine operation. The triple sealed construction, the rugged metal housing and the precisely manufactured movable parts ensure
long operational life in standard or oily environments (special models).
• 16 mm flat compact size
• Rugged metal housing
• Models with M12 connector or oil resistant VCTF cable
Full size
Ordering Information
Actuator type
Load range (VDC)*1 Operation LED indicator
0.8 W to 60 W max No
Yes
Plunger
■
■
-
Compact
Connection method
Order code
*2
■
3m
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
3m
Sealed plunger
3m
3m
Plunger with M14 mounting
3m
3m
Roller plunger
3m
3m
Sealed roller plunger
3m
3m
Roller plunger with M14 mounting
3m
3m
Crossroller plunger
3m
3m
Sealed crossroller plunger
3m
3m
Crossroller plunger with M14 mounting
3m
3m
Roller lever
3m
3m
Coil spring
■
-
■
■
■
3m
*1
*2
See specifications for details on max. current per rated voltage and load type. Micro load models with 5mW to 0.8W are available. For ordering refer to complete datasheet.
Pre-wired models with 30 cm PVC cable and M12 plug (pigtail) are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
General purpose
136
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
D4CC-3001
D4C-1201
D4CC-4001
D4C-3201
D4CC-3031
D4C-1231
D4CC-4031
D4C-3231
D4CC-3041
D4C-1241
D4CC-4041
D4C-3241
D4CC-3002
D4C-1202
D4CC-4002
D4C-3202
D4CC-3032
D4C-1232
D4CC-4032
D4C-3232
D4CC-3042
D4C-1242
D4CC-4042
D4C-3242
D4CC-3003
D4C-1203
D4CC-4003
D4C-3203
D4CC-3033
D4C-1233
D4CC-4033
D4C-3233
D4CC-3043
D4C-1243
D4CC-4043
D4C-3243
D4CC-3024
D4C-1220
D4CC-4024
D4C-3220
D4CC-3050
D4C-1250
D4CC-4050
D4C-3250
3m
-
Special
Basic housing
Material handling
For M12 cable connectors
see page 151
Accessories
D4C
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Specifications
Voltage and current rating
Model
Rated
voltage
[email protected]@@
Rated
current*1
Non-inductive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
Lamp load
NC
NO
NC
5A
5A
1.5 A
5A
5A
8 VDC
5A
14 VDC
5A
125 VAC
250 VAC
30 VDC
2A
2A
Inrush current
Inductive load
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
0.7 A
3A
3A
2.5 A
1.3 A
1A
0.5 A
2A
2A
1.5 A
0.8 A
20 A
max.
10 A
max.
5A
2A
2A
5A
4A
3A
3A
5A
2A
2A
4A
4A
3A
3A
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
125 VDC
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
2A
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
-
*1
-
Applicable load range
(5 to 30 VDC)
0.8 W to 60 W
0.8 W to 60 W
5 A max. 2.5 A
max
0.8 W to 30 W
20 A
max.
5 mW to 0.8 W
10 A
max.
For D4C- cable types these ratings are certified by TÜV Rheinland according to EN60947-5-1 (file no R9451333).
General specifications
Item
D4C-_ (cable types)
Operating frequency
Mechanical
10.000.000 operations min
Electrical
200.000 operations min
Mechanical
120 operations/min
Electrical
30 operations/min
LED indicator
Ambient temperature
Degree of protection
D4C-3_, D4C-6_, D4CC-4_: Operation indicator (red)
Operation indicator turns OFF when the switch operates.*2
Operating
-10° to 70°C (with no icing)
IEC 60529: IP67
Values are acquired at 5° to 35°C operating temperature, 40% to 70% operating humidity.
Models where operation indicator turns ON when the switch operates are available by adding '-B' to the order code. Contact your OMRON representative for availability.
8
*1
*2
D4CC-_ (connector types)
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Durability*1
For M12 cable connectors
see page 151
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
137
ZC
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Limit switch in compact metal housing
with terminal block
The compact housing size and the terminal block with side facing cable exit allow the
mounting where space is crucial and self-wiring connection is preferred. The rugged
and tight housing construction provides high protection while the low-force actuators
make the ZC limit switch ideal for switching smaller or lighter objects.
• Terminal block for self-wiring with side facing cable exit
• Low-force actuators for switching smaller or lighter objects
• Rugged metal housing with IP67 protection
Full size
Ordering Information
Actuator type
Connection method
Plunger
*1
Special
Basic housing
Compact
Order code
Terminal block with side facing ZC-D55
cable exit (left/right changeable)
for cables dia 8.5 to 10.5 mm*1
Plunger with M14 mounting
ZC-Q55
Sealed roller plunger
ZC-N2255
Roller plunger with M14 mounting
ZC-Q2255
Sealed cross roller plunger
ZC-N2155
Cross roller plunger with M14 mounting
ZC-Q2155
Hinge lever - 50R
ZC-W55
Hinge lever - 70R
ZC-W155
Hinge roller lever - 50R
ZC-W255
Hinge roller lever - 70R
ZC-W2155
Models with M20 conduit or other connection variations are available. Refer to OPTIONAL FEATURES in complete datasheet for details.
General purpose
138
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
ZC
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Specifications
Voltage and current rating
Model
Rated voltage
Standard type
Non-inductive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
Lamp load
NC and NO
NC
10
3
250 VAC
2.5
1.25
8 VDC
3
1.5
125 VAC
Inrush current
Inductive load
Motor load
NO
NC
NC
NO
NC
NO
1.5
10
5
2.5
30 A
15 A
3
1.5
5
2.5
5
2.5
2
1.5
NO
6
14 VDC
High current at high VDC
switching type*1
30 VDC
6
125 VDC
0.5
0.4
0.4
5
0.05
250 VDC
0.25
0.2
0.2
0.03
8 VDC
10
3
1.5
10
3
1.5
0.75
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
*1
7.5
6
2
1.5
Refer to OPTIONAL FEATURES in complete datasheet for details.
Durability
Mechanical
10.000.000 operations min
Electrical
500.000 operations min
Operating speed
Plunger
0.05 mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
Mechanical
120 operations / min
Electrical
20 operations / min
Insulation resistance
100 M min (at 500VDC)
Contact resistance (initial)
15 m max
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part
Vibration resistance
Malfunction
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction
1,000 m/s² min
Malfunction
300 m/s² min
Ambient temperature
Operating
-10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating
35% to 95% RH
Degree of protection
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
General specifications
IEC 60529: IP67
Additional specifications after EN60947-5-1 (TÜV Rheinland File No J50041904)
AC-12 10A/250 VAC
Rated insulation voltage
1,000 VAC
Short circuit protective device
10A fuse type gG (IEC60269)
Protection against electrical shock
Class II
8
Category
Operating characteristics
Values for OF and RF are in N and values for PT, OT, MD and OP are in mm unless otherwise specified.
[email protected]
[email protected]
Operating force (OF)
[email protected]
11.8
6.86
2.75
3.92
Release force (RF)
4.9
1.67
0.59
0.78
Pre-travel (PT)
1.5
Overtravel (OT)
2.4
Movement differential (MD)
0.2
Operating Position (OP)
32.4±0.8
General purpose
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
–
3
2.5
8.4
6
1.4
47.4±0.8
Food, Beverage and Pharma
38.2±0.8
Automotive
47.4±0.8
28.5±1.2
Semiconductor
1
43.0±1.2
Material handling
28.5±1.2
Accessories
139
Z
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Limit switch with basic plastic housing
The Z series of basic switches in plastic housing provide the same electrical and mechanical switching capability and lifetime as standard limit switches. But with the basic plastic housing the basic switches are an ideal solution with best value for money
for uncritical environments or when separately encased in subassemblies.
• Cost efficient basic plastic housing for subassemblies
• Same electrical and mechanical switching ratings as standard limit switches
Full size
Ordering information
Actuator type*1
*1
*2
Special
Basic housing
Compact
Order code*2
Solder terminal
Screw terminal
Pin plunger
Z-15G
Z-15G-B
Short spring plunger
Z-15GD
Z-15GD-B
Leaf spring
Z-15GL
Z-15GL-B
Reverse hinge lever
Z-15GM
Z-15GM-B
Reverse hinge roller lever
Z-15GM2
Z-15GM2-B
Plunger with M12 mounting
Z-15GQ
Z-15GQ-B
Hinge lever
Z-15GW
Z-15GW-B
Hinge roller lever
Z-15GW2
Z-15GW2-B
Other actuator types are available. For the full range refer to the complete datasheet.
Contacts are directly accessible. Additional protective measures are required e.g. order covers from accessories.
Specifications
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
NC
*1
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
15 A
5A
2.5 A
250 VAC
15 A
2.5 A
1.25 A
15 A
3A
1.5 A
8 VDC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
15 A
5A
2.5 A
14 VDC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
10 A
5A
2.5 A
30 VDC
6A
3A
1.5 A
5A
5A
2.5 A
125 VDC
0.5 A*1
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
For switching high currents at high voltages (e.g. 10A at 125VDC) contact your OMRON representative.
Durability
Mechanical
10,000,000 operations min.
Electrical
500,000 operations min.
Operating speed
Plunger
0.01 mm to 1 m/s
Operating frequency
Mechanical
240 operations/min
Electrical
20 operations/min
Operating
-25 to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient temperature
Degree of protection
General purpose
140
IP00
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
Z
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Accessories
Terminal covers (protection of electrical contacts against accidental contact of e. g. fingers)
Type
Material
Order code
for soldering terminal models for screw terminal models
AP-A
AP-B
AP1-A
AP1-B
Cover with bottom cable exit
AP-Z
8
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Cover with 5 thinner parts (plastic type) or holes (metal type) as plastic
cable exit positions. Protective cover is fixed to basic switch with metal
mounting screws of basic switch.
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
141
WL-_T, TZ
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Heat and cold resistant limit and
basic switches
The limit switches WL-_T provide the ruggedness, reliability and the wide actuator
range of the WL family and allow a direct usage in applications with temperatures
from -40°C up to 120°C. For applications with even lower or higher temperatures
the TZ basic switch provides reliable operation from -65° up to 400°C for subassemblies.
• -40°C to 120°C in rugged WL limit switch housing for direct usage
• -65°C to 400°C in TZ basic housing for sub-assemblies
Full size
Ordering Information
Actuator type
Connection method
Order code
WL_-TCG
(-40° to 40°C)
WL_-THG
(+5 to 120°C)
TZ-1G_
(-65° to 400°C)
WLCA2-TCG
WLCA2-THG
–
WLCA2-2NTCG
WLCA2-2NTHG
Adjustable roller lever
WLCA12-TCG
WLCA12-THG
Adjustable roller lever (side mounting
and 90° overtravel)
WLCA12-2NTCG
WLCA12-2NTHG
Top plunger
WLD-TCG
WLD-THG
Top roller plunger
WLD2-TCG
WLD2-THG
Top ball plunger
WLD3-TCG
WLD3-THG
Horizontal plunger
WLSD-TCG
WLSD-THG
Horizontal roller plunger
WLSD2-TCG
WLSD2-THG
Horizontal ball plunger
WLSD3-TCG
WLSD3-THG
Coil spring
WLNJ-TCG
WLNJ-THG
Coil spring (multi wire)
WLNJ-30TCG
WLNJ-30THG
Steel wire
WLNJ-S2TCG
WLNJ-S2THG
–
–
Roller lever (80° overtravel)
Roller lever (side mounting
and 90° overtravel)
Screw terminal
(with PG 13.5 conduit)*1
Screw terminal*2
Pin plunger
*1
*2
Special
Basic housing
Compact
TZ-1G
Hinge lever
TZ-1GV
Hinge roller lever
TZ-1GV2
Models with screw terminals with M20 conduit instead of PG13.5 are available. Contact your OMRON representative.
Screw contacts are directly accessible. Additional protective measures or covers are required.
General purpose
142
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
WL-_T, TZ
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Specifications
Voltage and current rating
Model
Rated voltage
WL
TZ
Rated current (TÜV: Non-inductive load
EN60947-5-1)
Resistive load
Lamp load (NC)
Lamp Load (NO)
Inductive load
Motor load (NC)
Motor load (NO)
125 VAC
-
3A
1.5 A
10 A
5A
2.5 A
250 VAC
2A
2A
1A
3A
1.5 A
500 VAC
-
1.5 A
0.8 A
3A
1.5 A
0.8 A
8 VDC
-
6A
3A
10 A
6A
14 VDC
-
30 VDC
-
6A
4A
6A
4A
48 VDC
2A
-
125 VDC
-
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.8 A
0.2 A
250 VDC
-
0.4 A
0.1 A
0.4 A
0.1 A
8 VDC
-
1A
0.9 A
1A
1.5 A
14 VDC
-
30 VDC
10 A
Inductive load
0.45 A
-
*1
General specifications
WL_-TCG
Durability*1
Operating speed
Operating frequency
Ambient temperature
TZ-1G_
10,000,000 operations min
100,000 operations min
Electrical
750,000 operations min
50,000 operations min
Pin plunger
-
0.05 mm to 1 m/s
Roller lever
1 mm to 1 m/s
-
Mechanical
120 operations / minute
60 operations / minute
Electrical
30 operations / minute
Operating*2
-40°C to 40°C
Degree of protection
20 operations / minute
5°C to 120°C
IEC 60529: IP67
-65°C to 400°C
IEC 60529: IP00
Values are acquired at 5° to 35°C operating temperature and 40% to 70% operating humidity
With no icing
8
*1
*2
WL_-THG
Mechanical
Mechanical sensors/Limit switches
Item
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
143
ROTARY ENCODERS
For machines that Never Stop
The accurate coordination of object and machine part movement is mandatory for the production
of high quality products. The high signal repeat accuracy of our incremental and absolute encoders
ensures reliable detection of machine part movement.
Incremental encoder in compact housing
E6C2-C, E6C3-C
•
see page 147
E6A2-C
E6B2-C
Dia 50 mm housing
smaller size:
•
5000 rpm max rotation frequency
•
Resolution range from 10 to 3600 pulses / rotation
see page 146
E6F-C
enhanced mechanical resistance:
see page 147
E6H-C
higher rotation frequency:
see page 148
144
see page 146
Absolute encoder in compact housing
E6C3-A
•
see page 149
E6F-A
Dia 50 mm housing
enhanced mechanical resistance:
•
5000 rpm max rotation frequency
•
Resolution range from 6 to 1024 pulses / rotation
page 149
Rotary encoders
E6C-N
multiturn:
9
page 148
145
E6A2-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder in miniature
housing
The E6A family of rotary encoders features a small sized dia 25 mm housing.
• Small sized dia 25 mm housing
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Output phase
Power supply voltage
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
25
A
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 500 E6A2-CS3E
NPN open collector
10, 20, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 500 E6A2-CS3C
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CW3E
NPN open collector
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CW3C
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CWZ3E
NPN open collector
100, 200, 360, 500
E6A2-CWZ3C
12 to 24VDC
A, B
E6A2-CS5C
5 to 12 VDC
12 to 24VDC
A, B, Z
Order code
E6A2-CW5C
5 to 12 VDC
12 to 24VDC
E6A2-CWZ5C
E6B2-C
Incremental rotary encoder in compact
housing
The E6B family of incremental rotary encoders features a housing size dia 40 mm.
• Line driver output models available
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Power supply voltage
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
Order code
40
5 to 24 VDC
NPN open collector output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 720, 800,
1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500 1,800, 2,000
E6B2-CWZ6C
12 to 24VDC
PNP open collector output
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1,000, 2,000
E6B2-CWZ5B
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 1,000, 1,200, E6B2-CWZ3E
1,500 1,800, 2,000
5 VDC
Line driver output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 1,000, 1,024, E6B2-CWZ1X
1,200, 1,500 1,800, 2,000
General purpose
146
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E6C2-C/E6C3-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder with enhanced
water resistant
The E6C family of dia 50 mm incremental rotary encoders features an improved water
resistance compared to standard models.
• IP64f or IP65f drip-proof, oil-proof construction
Ordering information
Standard models
Size dia. in mm Power supply voltage
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
50
5 to 24 VDC
NPN open collector output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ6C
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000
12 to 24VDC
PNP open collector output
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1,000, 2,000
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ3E
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000
5 VDC
Line driver output
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, E6C2-CWZ1X
600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000
12 to 24VDC
Complimentary output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ5GH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
5 to 12 VDC
NPN voltage output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ3EH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
5 to 12 VDC
Line driver output
100, 200, 300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, E6C3-CWZ3XH
1,200, 1,500, 1,800, 2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
8 dia. tough model
Order code
E6C2-CWZ5B
Incremental rotary encoder in rugged
housing
The E6F family of dia 60 mm rotary encoders features a rugged housing.
9
• Strong shaft for max 120 N in radial direction and max 50 N in thrust direction)
• Water- and oil-proof structure (IP65f)
Rotary encoders
E6F-C
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Power supply voltage
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
Order code
60
12 to 24VDC
Complimentary output
100, 200, 360, 500, 600, 1000
E6F-CWZ5G
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
147
E6H-C
Rotary encoders
Incremental rotary encoder with hollow shaft
The E6H family of incremental encoders features a dia 40 mm housing with hollow
shaft.
• Wide operating voltage range from 5 to 24 VDC
• Line drive output available (100 m max.)
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Power supply voltage
Output form
Resolution (pulse/rotation)
Order code
40
5 to 24 VDC
Open collector output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ6C
5 to 12 VDC
Voltage output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ3E
5 to 12 VDC
Line drive output
300, 360, 500, 600, 720, 800, 1,000, 1,024, 1,200, 1,500, 1,800,
2,000, 2,048, 2,500, 3,600
E6H-CWZ3X
E6C-N
Multiturn rotary encoder
The E6C-N rotary encoder provides a multiturn function for applications with
rotations over 360°.
• Multiturn function
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Name
Order code
50
Shaft model with cable
E6C-NN5C
Hollow-shaft model with cable
E6C-NN5CA
Shaft model with connector
E6C-NN5C-C
Hollow-shaft model with connector
E6C-NN5CA-C
General purpose
148
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
E6C3-A
Rotary encoders
Absolute rotary encoder with enhanced
water resistance
The E6C family of dia 50 mm incremental rotary encoders features an improved water
resistance compared to standard models.
• IP65f drip-proof, oil-proof construction
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Power supply voltage
Output form
Output code
Resolution
(pulse/rotation)
Connection method
Order code
50
12 to 24VDC
NPN open collector output
Gray code
256, 360
Connector type
E6C3-AG5C-C
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired type
E6C3-AG5C
PNP open collector output
5 VDC
NPN voltage output
Binary
32, 40
E6C3-AN5C
BCD
6, 8, 12
E6C3-AB5C
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
E6C3-AG5B
Binary
32, 40
E6C3-AN5B
BCD
6, 8, 12
E6C3-AB5B
Binary
256
E6C3-AN1E
12 VDC
E6C3-AN2E
E6F-A
Absolute rotary encoder in rugged housing
The E6F family of dia 60 mm rotary encoders features a rugged housing.
9
Rotary encoders
• Stronger shaft and higher durability (120 N in radial direction and 50 N
in thrust direction) than previous E6F Encoders
• Drip-proof construction meets IP64F standards
• High-resolution models (1024 pulses max. per revolution)
• Faster response for high-speed control applications (grey code: 20 kHz)
Ordering information
Size dia. in mm
Power supply voltage
Output form
Output code
Resolution
(pulses/revolution)
Connection method
Order code
60
12 to 24 VDC
NPN open collector
BCD
360
Pre-wired
E6F-AB5C
Connector type*1
E6F-AB5C-C
PNP open collector
*1
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired
E6F-AG5C
BCD
360
Pre-wired
E6F-AB5B
Gray code
256, 360, 720, 1,024
Pre-wired
E6F-AG5B
For extension cables order E69-DF5 (5M) or E69-DF10 (10M).
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
149
150
Cable connectors
M8
Type
General purpose
(screw)
Features
• 3 pin (LED
optionally)
Material
Order code
Nut
Cable
Brass (CuZn)
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS3F-M8PVC3S2M
XS3F-M8PUR3S2M
XS3F-M8PVC3A2M
XS3F-M8PUR3A2M
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS3F-M8PVC4S2M
XS3F-M8PUR4S2M
XS3F-M8PVC4A2M
XS3F-M8PUR4A2M
• 4pin
Detergent resistant 4 pin
Stainless steel (SUS316L) PVC 2 m
Y92E-S08PVC4S2M-L
Y92E-S08PVC4A2M-L
Robotic
(drag chain)
Brass (CuZn)
Robotic PVC 2 m
XS3F-M421-402-R
XS3F-M422-402-R
Robotic PUR 2 m
Y92E-M08PUR4S2M-L
Y92E-M08PUR4A2M-L
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC3S2M
XS2F-M12PUR3S2M
XS2F-M12PVC3A2M
XS2F-M12PUR3A2M
• 4 wire
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC4S2M
XS2F-M12PUR4S2M
XS2F-M12PVC4A2M
XS2F-M12PUR4A2M
• 5 wire
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS2F-M12PVC5S2M
XS2F-M12PUR5S2M
XS2F-M12PVC5A2M
XS2F-M12PUR5A2M
4 pin
Robotic (drag chain
& torsion)
M12
General purpose
(screw)
• 3 wire (LED
optionally)
Brass (CuZn)
Detergent resistant 4 wire
Stainless steel (SUS316L) PVC 2 m
Y92E-S12PVC4S2M-L
Y92E-S12PVC4A2M-L
105°C
Heat resistant
4 wire
Stainless steel (SUS316L) Heat resistant PVC 2 m
XS2F-E421-D80-E
XS2F-E422-D80-E
Twist & click
4 wire
Nickel plated Zinc
PVC 2 m
PUR 2 m
XS5F-D421-D80-F
XS5F-D421-D80-P
XS5F-D422-D80-F
XS5F-D422-D80-P
Robotic
(drag chain)
4 wire
Brass (CuZn)
Robotic PVC 2 m
XS2F-D421-D80-F
XS2F-D422-D80-F
Robotic PUR 2 m
Y92E-M12PUR4S2M-L
Y92E-M12PUR4A2M-L
Special fiber connec- PBT
tor - 4 wire
PVC 2 m
E3X-CN21
Special fiber connec- Plug: Zinc diecast
tor + M8 plug
PVC 30 cm with M8
4-pin plug
E3X-CN21-M3J-2 0.3M
Special fiber connector + M12 plug
PVC 30 cm with M12
4-pin plug
E3X-CN21-M1J 0.3M
PVC 2 m
EE-1017 2M
Robotic (drag chain
& torsion)
Fiber amplifier (E3X)
connector
Fiber amplifier
connectors
Photomicrosensor
(EE-SX)
connector
Cable connector
M8/M12
Confectionable
Plugs and connectors Brass
for self assembly
M12
Field I/0 boxes
Direct wiring
or DeviceNet
communication
M8/M12
*1
T-connectors,
covers, accessories
and extended
wiring portfolio
*1
standard cable
Nylon
robotic cable
Cable connectors
Shape
EE-1017-R 2M
n.a.
*1
XS2G, XS2C*1
Y92E_conf
10
Size
XW3B, XW3D, DRT2*1
XS2R, XS3R, XS2H, XS2W*1
Refer to complete accessory datasheet E26E for details.
For more information see
E26E accessory datasheet on
www.industrial.omron.eu
General purpose
Food, Beverage and Pharma
Automotive
Semiconductor
Material handling
Accessories
151
152
Photoelectric sensors
Technical information
Explanation of terms
Item
Sensing distance
Explanatory diagram
Meaning
Throughbeam
This is the maximum detection distance that can be set with stability for through-beam
and retroreflective models, taking into account product deviations and temperature fluctuations. Actual distances in standard conditions will be longer than the rated detection
distances for both models.
Sensing distance
Retroreflective
Sensing distance
Diffuse reflective
This is the maximum detection distance that can be set with stability for the diffuse
reflective models, taking into account product deviations and temperature fluctuations,
using the standard test object (white drawing paper). Actual distances in standard conditions will be longer than the rated detection distance.
Sensing range
Detection range/
Set range
Distance setting
Setting
distance
In contrast to non distance-setting photoelectric sensors, which detect the presense
(or not) of an object by means of the amount of light reflected back and thus have difficulty
detecting objects with low reflectance, the distance-setting type detects the presense of
the object based on the position, not the amount, of the reflected light. Suffering little from
the effects of background objects and color, this type enables stable detection.
A PSD (Position Detection Device) is used in the detector. Detection range: The range
where detection is possible. Set range: A range where the distance to the detected object
can be set.
N
F
Light
emitting
diode
(LED)
Sensing distance
Directional angle
Emitter
Through-beam models, retroreflective models
The range of angles where operation as a photoelectric sensor is possible.
Receiver
Angle of beam spread
Differential distance
Diffuse-reflective model
The difference between the operating distance and the reset distance.
Generally expressed in catalogs as a percentage of the detection distance.
Reset distance
Operating distance
Emitter
Sensing
object
ON
OFF
Dead zone
The “Dead zone” is the non-operational area outside of the emission and detection areas
near the lens surface in mark sensors, the distancesetting type, the limited reflective
model, the diffuse-reflective model, and the retroreflective model. Detection is not possible in this area.
Dead zone
Triple reflector
Response time
The “response time” is the lag time from the on/off of the light input to
activation or reset of the control output. In general, for photoelectric sensors,
activation time (Ton)  release time (Toff).
Light input
Control output
Release time
(T off)
11
Operating time
(T on)
Technical information
Hysteresis distance
153
Photoelectric sensors
Item
Technical information
Explanatory diagram
Dark-on operation
Meaning
Sensing
object
Emitter
Receiver
“Dark on” is a model that outputs when the light entering the detector is shielded
or decreases. The output method is expressed as DARK ON.
“Light on” is a model that outputs when the light entering the detector increases.
The output method is expressed as LIGHT ON.
Output
ON
YES
Sensing
object
Emitter/
Receiver
Output
ON
NO
Light-on operation
Sensing
object
Emitter
Receiver
Output
ON
NO
Sensing
object
Emitter/
Receiver
Output
ON
YES
Minimum detection object
Receiver
Typical examples are given of the smallest objects that can be detected using
Through-beam and retroreflective models with the sensitivity correctly adjusted to the
light-on activation level at the rated detection distance.
For the reflection model, typical examples are given of the smallest objects that can be
detected with the sensitivity set to the highest level.
Emitter
Reflector
Emitter
Emitter/
Receiver
Smallest detection object
with slit attached
Sensing
object
154
Slit
Typical examples are given of the smallest objects that can be detected using Throughbeam and retroreflective models with a slit attached. The sensitivity is correctly adjusted
to the light-on activation level at the rated detection distance, and the slit is moved along
its length and parallel to the object.
Photoelectric sensors
Technical information
M.S.R. function
The Mirror Surface Rejection (MSR) is a function using the effect that light can be polarized and filtered according to the polarization direction. This effect can be used to avoid wrong detection of objects
with smooth glossy surfaces like aluminium cans.
No object
Non-glossy object
Object with a smooth, glossy surface
The light from the emitter hits the reflective plate and returns to Light from the emitter is obstructed by the object, does not reach (Example: battery, can, etc.)
the detector.
the reflective plate, and does not return to the detector.
Light from the emitter is reflected by the object and returns to the
detector.
A direct reflection to the receiver from the surface of the object can be avoided by mounting the sensor at an angle. But for higher detection reliability the M.S.R. (Mirror Surface Rejection) function
provides a solution for this type of application.
Technical information
If an object with a smooth, glossy surface passes the emitted
polarized light is returned to the receiver. As the polarization plane
is not turned 90° the light does not pass the polarization filter in
front of the receiver and the objects can be detected independant
of their surface.
11
The light from the emitter is now polarized. The polarization plane is turned 90° by a reflector consisting of many small mirrors
aligned so the light is reflected three times (triple reflector).
155
Photoelectric sensors
Technical information
Contrast and colour sensing
Item
Explanatory diagram
Meaning
Black marks on
monochrome backgrounds
Light intensity
Contrast sensing
Contrast/mark sensors evaluate the
intensity/amount of the returned light
and are able to distinguish between
two levels e.g. a black print mark
and the background by setting the
threshold in the middle between the
two intensity levels.
Threshold
Background
Black mark
Light intensity
Black marks with
multi-coloured backgrounds (Register
mark mode)
R G B Tot.
Colour 1
R G B Tot.
Colour 2
R G B Tot.
Colour 3
Black mark
RGB ratio comparison (C-mode)
Light intensity
Colour/colour mark
detection
For a stable detection of black marks
on multi-coloured backgrounds,
a higher detection stability can be
achieved when the threshold is
set closer to the black mark light
intensity.
R
G B
Colour 1
Total
R
G B
Colour 2
Total
Light intensity
Colour intensity
comparison
(I-mode)
156
Treshold
R G B
Colour 1
R G B
Colour 2
Evaluation
Colours with similar black/white
contrast values may be difficult to
differentiate by standard contrast
sensors.
Sensors evaluating the difference in
the colour spectrum by comparing
RGB (red, green, blue) ratios, allow a
differentiation of colours (full colour
sensors).
For colours with similar RGB values,
evaluating not the full RGB ratio but
only the colour with the highest value
difference, provides a higher detection stability.
Inductive sensors
Technical information
Inductive proximity switch
Item
Principle of operation
Copper coil
Electrical circuit
An inductive proximity sensor consists of a coil wound around a ferrite core at the
sensing head. A high frequency is applied to this, generating an oscillating electromagnetic field around it. This is monitored by internal circuitry.
When a metallic object travels toward the field, electric currents are created in the
object (eddy currents). As the target approaches the sensing face these increase
in size.
These currents cause a transformer like effect, as a result the energy in the detecting coil lessens and the oscillations reduce. As the object moves in closer the oscillation finally stops.
The monitoring circuitry detects the stopping of the oscillations and then switches
the output on. The object has now been detected.
Because the operating principle uses an electromagnetic field, proximity sensors
excel over the Iikes of photoelectric sensors in environmental resistance. The likes
of water, oil or dirt generally have no influence on the operation of the sensor making the use on machine tools etc. common place.
Shielded sensors
(flush mounting)
Shielded sensors are made with a shielding plate around the ferrite core. This has
the effect of limiting the electromagnetic field to the front of the head. The sensor
can be mounted flush in metal surfaces. This gives the advantage of mechanical
protection, along with sensing directly adjacent to the sensing face. This limits the
sensing range, but the sensor can be mounted with ease with surrounding metals
taking no effect.
Unshielded sensors
(non-flush mounting)
Unlike the shielded sensor there is no shielding around the ferrite core.
This gives a greater sensing range than the equivalent diameter shielded proximity
sensor. For the same diameter the range is generally doubled.
As the field extends to the side of the proximity switch it can be influenced by metals in this area. Thus it cannot be flush mounted and requires more distance to other proximity sensors or metal parts.
Standard target
Bring the target towards
the sensor
Sensing distance
(operating position)
The sensing distances quoted in the specifications for the proximity sensors are
based on a standard target. This target (known as a standard object) is a square
plate of mild steel 1 mm thick, a primarily ferrous object.
When the target reaches the point where the sensor operates, this is the sensing
distance.
The sensor will release (i.e. turn off) at a point lightly further from the sensing face
(hysteresis).
Release position
Technical information
Operating position
11
Sensing distance
157
Inductive sensors
Technical information
Item
Output and Connection
For the output mode NO
(normally open) the control
output is OFF if no object
is present.
DC 2-wire
Timing chart for NO (normally open)
Non-sensing zone
Output circuit
Sensing zone
+V
Load
Sensing
object
Brown
Proximity sensor
(%)
100
80
Proximity
sensor
main
0
Rated
sensing
distance
ON Yellow indicator
OFF
ON Red indicator
OFF
ON Control output
OFF
0V
Blue
Load can be connected to +V or 0V side.
M12 Connector
Pin Arrangement
DC 3-wire
For the output mode NC
(normally closed) the control
output is ON if no object
is present.
Output circuit (example for NPN)
Timing chart for NC (normally closed)
Non-sensing zone
Sensing zone
Brown
+V
Sensing
object
Load
Proximity sensor
(%)
100
Rated
sensing
distance
0
ON Yellow indicator
OFF
Proximity
sensor
main
circuit
(see note)
Black
Blue
0V
ON Control output
OFF
Note: With M8 connector models,
there is no output reverse polarity protection diode.
M12 Connector
(see note)
M8 Connector
(3 Pin)
M8 Connector
(4 Pin)
Note: Terminal 2 of the M12 connector is not used.
DC 4-wire
For the output mode NO+NC
(antivalent) the NO output is
OFF and the NC output is
ON if no object is present.
Timing chart for NO+NC (antivalent)
Non-sensing zone
Output circuit (example for PNP)
Sensing zone
Brown
Sensing
object
Proximity sensor
(%)
100
Rated
sensing
distance
0
Proximity
sensor
main
circuit
ON Yellow indicator
OFF
Black
NO output
Load
White
NC output
ON NO output
OFF
Load
Blue
ON NC output
OFF
M12 Connector
Pin Arrangement
158
+V
0V
Fiber optics
Technical information
Fiber optics
Item
Principle of operation
Fiber optic photoelectric sensors comprise two parts, the amplifier and the
sensing head. The amplifier contains the emitter (the light source) and receiver
(detector) along with their associated electronics. The fiber optic cable is the
means used to transfer the light to the sensing head.
The light source (an LED) transmits the light beam down the fiber optic cable
by repeatedly reflecting the light off the boundary between the fiber core and its
sheath. When it reaches the end of the fiber the light is dispersed at the end.
LED
Sheath
Core
Light
approx. 60°
When the light is dispersed it spreads out and forms a beam much like that
of other sensors, but on a smaller scale. With smaller light sources and lens
areas the sensing ranges are on the whole much shorter.
Types of fiber
Fiber optic heads mainly split into two types, through-beam and diffuse
(although there are a few retro-reflective types). The principle of operation
of both types is exactly that of standard photoelectric sensors.
Matchstick
Construction
Standard fiber: Most fiber optic sensing heads use this configuration of fiber
(i.e. a single fiber covered by a protective sheath). The fibers are usually plastic,
0.5 to 1 mm in diameter and covered in a plastic protective sheath.
Fiber
Sheath
Coaxial fiber: This gives greater accuracy. The core is used as the transmitter
and the surrounding fibers are bundled together to form the receiver. This gives
better accuracy, the target can enter the detecting area from any direction.
Receivers
Multicore: These consist of large numbers of small fibers. This results in a more
flexible cable (E32-R types) which can literally be tied in a knot.
Robotic: In robotic fibers the multicore fibers are manufactured without fixation.
This allows them to move freely reducing mechanical stress when the fiber is bent.
Fibers
11
Sheath
Technical information
Transmitter
159
Fiber optics
Technical information
Item
Using fiber optic sensors
The main advantage of fiber optics is that they are small. This means that they can
be mounted in places where other sensors couldn't fit.
As the sensor heads are extremely compact, they are ideal for the stable detection
of small objects. As a result of the less light that is emitted they generally do have
smaller ranges than conventional photoelectric sensors.
Fiber optic sensor heads can be used in areas that standard sensors are
unable to go, for instance hazardous areas, This is because no electric current
flows through them. This also means they are totally unaffected by electrical
noise (provided the amplifier is suitably positioned).
By using glass fibers instead of plastic they can be used in areas of up to 350°C.
Target object
HAZARDOUS AREA
Seal
Partition
NON-CRITICAL
AREA
Lens
(E39-F3A-5)
Fiber unit
(E32-EC41)
Insertion
160
Extremely small objects can be detected with a diffuse coaxial sensor and additional focal lens. Using these, objects as small as 100 μm can be detected.
Protective Structure
Technical information
Protective Structure
Note: IP-XX is based on the following testing method. Please verify sealing in the actual environment and conditions of use before using.
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) Standards
(IEC60529:2001)
IP-
IPProtective characteristic symbol (International Protection)
Symbols 1 and 2 of IEC60529
Symbol 1: Level of protection against solid objects
Level of protection against oil penetration
Level
Amount of protection
0
ø50 mm
1
ø12,5 mm
2
5
6
Level
Amount of protection
No protection
f
Oil resistant
Solid objects 50 mm or larger in diameter (hand, etc.)
do not penetrate.
g
Oil proof
Solid objects 12.5 mm or larger in diameter
do not penetrate.
2,5 mm
Wires or other solid objects 2.5 mm or larger in
diameter do not penetrate.
1 mm
Wires or other solid objects 1 mm or larger in
diameter do not penetrate.
3
4
JEM (Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association)
Standards (JEM1030:1991)
Suffers no damaging effects from oil drop or oil spray incident
from any direction
Oil drops or oil spray incident from any irection does
not penetrate.
Note: Other levels (h, c, d and e) also exist.
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)
Table for converting NEMA enclosures to IEC60529
(conversion from IEC60529 to NEMA is not possible)
Nema 250
An amount of dust suffi cient to interfere with normal operation
of the device or create a safety problem does not enter.
Dust does not enter.
IEC 60529
Nema 250
IEC 60529
1
IP10
4, 4X
IP56
2
IP11
5
IP52
3
IP54
6, 6P
IP67
3R
IP14
12, 12K
IP52
3S
IP54
13
IP54
Note: From Appendix A of NEMA standard 250. NEMA enclosure levels and IEC60529
differ in the areas of corrosion resistance, rust resistance, and icing characteristics.
Symbol 2: Level of protection against water penetration
Amount of protection
Summary of test method (test uses fresh water)
No protection against
water penetration.
No test
1
Suffers no damaging effects from vertically
dripping water.
Placed under vertically dripping water from a dripping
tester for 10 minutes.
2
Suffers no damaging effects from water dripping
no more than 15º out of plumb.
Placed at an inclination of 15º under dripping water
from a dripping tester for 10 minutes (2.5 minutes in
each direction).
3
Suffers no damaging effects from water sprayed
from an angle up to 60º from plumb.
Using the tester at right, the device is sprayed from each
side up to an angle of 60º from plumb for 10 minutes).
4
Suffers no damaging effects from water sprayed
from all directions.
Using the tester at right, the device is sprayed from all
directons for 10 minutes.
5
Suffers no damaging effects from and direct
jet spray from all directions.
Using the tester at right, each square meter of the case
is sprayed from all directions for 1 minute, for a total of
at least 3 minutes.
6
Suffers no damaging effects from strong and
direct jet spray from all directions.
Using the tester at right, each square meter of the case
is sprayed from all directions for 1 minute, for a total of
at least 3 minutes.
7
Water does not penetrate when the device is
submerged for a specified amount of time at a
specified pressure.
The device is submerged for 10 minutes at depth
of 1 m in water (if the height of the device is less
than 850 mm)
8
The device can be used on a regular basis
under water.
Decided by the manufacturer and the user of the
device.
No special protection
15°
1m
90°
IP69k according to DIN40 050/9
The IP69k test according to DIN 40 050 part 9 is intended to simulate high pressure / steam cleaning. During the test 14-16 l/min water at 80ºC is
sprayed onto the sensor from different angles with 8000-10000 kPa. The sensor may not suffer any damaging effects from high pressure water in
appearance and functionality.
Technical information
0
11
Level
60°
30°
10-15 cm
0°
161
Outline of Major Standards
Type of product
Product
family*1
Standard products E2C
with rated voltage E2EC
<=30 VDC and
E2E Small
30 VAC
diameter
Marks on CE
product or EMC directive
label
UL
Low voltage
directive
Machine directive UL 508
(UL 60947 in
preparation)
2006/42/EC
Other countries
Special, industry
e.g. CCC, Gost etc specific
Additional OMRON
specific*2
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
Applicable if
product contains
parts emitting
potentially
disturbing
electromagnetic
noise
Applicable if rated
supply voltage
>50 VAC or
>75 VDC
Applicable if
Applicable if rated
product category voltage is >30 VAC
is listed as falling or >30 VDC
under the machine
directive (e.g.
safety
components)
CCC: applicable if
product category
is listed as falling
under CCC and
rated voltage is
>36 VAC or
>36 VDC
Other countries:
see note*3
Voluntary or
mandatory
application
specific
certification (refer
to product
information for
details)
Extended lifetime
and operational
reliability tests
(applicable for all
OMRON prime
standard products
– refer to product
information for
details)
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
–
■
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
–
■
CE
■
n.a.*4
n.a.
n.a.*4
n.a.
n.a.*5
■
E2S
E3G-_
E3H2
E3S
E3T
E3X
E6
EE-SX
F3EM
F3ET
TL-W
D4CC-_
D5B
TZ
E3C Laser
E3Z Laser
162
Major Standards
Type of product
Product
family*1
Major Standards
Marks on CE
product or EMC directive
label
UL
Low voltage
directive
Machine directive UL 508
(UL 60947 in
preparation)
2006/42/EC
Other countries
Special, industry
e.g. CCC, Gost etc specific
Additional OMRON
specific*2
CCC: applicable if
product category
is listed as falling
under CCC and
rated voltage is
>36 VAC or
>36 VDC
Other countries:
see note*3
Voluntary or
mandatory
application
specific
certification (refer
to product
information for
details)
Extended lifetime
and operational
reliability tests
(applicable for all
OMRON prime
standard products
– refer to product
information for
details)
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
Applicable if
product contains
parts emitting
potentially
disturbing
electromagnetic
noise
Applicable if rated
supply voltage
>50 VAC or
>75 VDC
Applicable if
Applicable if rated
product category voltage is >30 VAC
is listed as falling or >30 VDC
under the machine
directive (e.g.
safety
components)
CE, UL
■
■
n.a.
■
■
–
■
CE
■
■
n.a.
–*6
■
–
■
XS
UL
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
■
n.a.
–
■
E2E
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
■
■
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
–*7
n.a.
■
■
E2FQ
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
*8
n.a.
–
■
E2AU
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
*9
*9
■
■
D4B
■
■
■
■
■
■
D4N
CE, UL, TÜV, n.a.
others
D4C-_
CE, UL, TÜV n.a.
■
n.a.
■
■
■
■
Standard products E3JK
with rated voltage X
>30 VDC and
Z
30 VAC
E3G-M_
E3JM
Standard and
application
specific products
with rated voltage
<=30 VDC and
30 VAC and
additional certification*7
E2FM
E2Q5
E3F2
E3FR
E3FZ
E3Z
E3ZM
E2A
E2A3
E2EH
WL
ZC
Products without
rated supply
voltage
CE
■
n.a.
n.a.
*9
n.a.
■
–
Y92E-S08
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
–
–
Y92E-M12/
Y92E-S12
UL
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
■
n.a.
–
–
E32
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
E39
This table provides an overview for models listed in this guide. Other special models may exist with different specifications, ratings and certifications.
OMRON voluntarily provides RoHS certification after the RoHS directive. A RoHS mark is applied on the package label for applicable products. Contact your OMRON representative for more details.
Please contact your OMRON representative for details on other certificates and standards.
Voluntary Laser classification after LASER standard EN60825-1 and LED standard EN62471 listed under Low voltage directive. Additional Laser classification after FDA.
E3Z Laser has additional IP69k specification after DIN 40050 part 9.
Special UL listed models are available.
E2A, E2A3 and E2EH are rated up to 32VDC. For usage in USA and Canada use class II circuit only.
Applicable for DC 2-wire types only.
Can be sold as general product. For application specific usage (e.g. elevators, mobile machines, etc) confirm with local legislation and requirements first.
11
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
F3E
Major Standards
Non OMRON
brand products
163
Product dimensions
Technical information
Inductive sensors
Models: E2A, E2AU, E2A DC 2-wire
E2A-S08KS02-M1-__
E2A-M18KS08-M1-__/E2A-S18KS08-M1-_
53
43
39
27
M8×1
5
10
4
24
3
13
M12×1
M12×1
Indicator (See note.)
Indicator (See note.)
Two, clamping nuts
M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
E2A-M12KS04-M1-__/E2A-S12KS04-M1-_
E2A-M30KS15-M1-__/E2A-S30KS15-M1-_
58
44
48
36
4
17
7
10
5
34
M12×1
M12×1
Indicator
(See note.)
Indicator (See note.)
M12×1
Two, clamping nuts
M30×1.5
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
Note 2: for NO+NC (-B3 /-C3) models the total
length is 4 mm longer
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
E2A-M18KN16-M1-__/E2A-S18KN16-M1-_
E2A-S08KN04-M1-_ _
53
43
13
39
M12×1
5
10
24
4
10
M12×1
15.3 dia.
6
27
3
6 dia.
Indicator (See note.)
M8×1
Indicator (See note.)
M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
Two, clamping nuts
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
E2A-M12KN08-M1-__/E2A-S12KN08-M1-_
E2A-M30KN20-M1-__/E2A-S30KN20-M1-_
58
44
48
7
10
M12×1
M12×1
9.4 dia.
M12×1
Indicator
(See note.)
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
Note 2: for NO+NC (-B3 /-C3) models the total
length is 4 mm longer
164
5
26.6 dia.
7
15
36
34
4
17
M30×1.5
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
Indicator
(See note.)
Two, clamping nuts
Product dimensions
Technical information
E2A-M18KS08-WP-__/E2A-S18KS08-WP-_
E2A-S08KS02-WP-__
59.5
40
39
27
24
4
10
5
3
13
(See note 1.)
Indicator (See note 2.)
Two, clamping nuts
M8×1
(See note 1.)
Indicator (See note 2.)
M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors
(conductor cross section: 0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm);
standard length: 2 m
Note 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors
(conductor cross section: 0.3 mm2;
insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m
Note 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
E2A-M12KS04-WP-__/E2A-S12KS04-WP-_
E2A-M30KS15-WP-__/E2A-S30KS15-WP-_
64.5
44
50.3
10
7
(See note 1.)
Indicator (See note 2.)
Two, clamping nuts
M12×1
5
36
34
4
17
(See note 1.)
Indicator (See note 2.)
M30×1.5
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors
(conductor cross section: 0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm);
standard length: 2 m
Note 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
Note 3. for NO+NC (-B3 /-C3) models the total length is 4 mm longer
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors
(conductor cross section: 0.3 mm2;
insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m
Note 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
Models: E2EC, E2E Small diameter
E2EC-CR8D_
Shielded robot cable with a conductor,
1.6 dia.; standard length: 400 mm
35
6
25.5
12
6
*1
3 dia.
8
Indicator *2
E2E-X1_ _
E2E-C1_ _
25
17.5
9.7 dia.
4 dia.
25
17.5
Operation
indicator
(red)
5.4 dia.
15
8
M5×0.5
25
17.5
Operation
indicator (red)
Two clamping nuts
Toothed
washer
4
Operation
indicator
(red)
Technical information
E2E-CR8__
(Examples: pre-wired versions, please note that minor variations of the dimensions are possible for different models e.g. for connector models)
Models: E2S
2.6
E2S-W1_
Sensing surface
2
5.5 6.4
5.9
8.4
2
22.3
25.1
5.9
Indicator *
11
R1.5
2.3
2
1
19
165
Product dimensions
Technical information
Indicator *
E2S-W2_
2.5
Sensing surface
10.8
8
2.3
7.4
7.8
8
10.1
3.1 dia.
3.1 dia. mounting holes
11.5
5.3
7.4
2
2
11.3
15.5
3
TL-W5E_
TL-W5F_
20
10.5
Operation indicator (red)
10
8
4.5
0
15
24.9 -0.4
(2)
50
16 dia.
Sensing surface
4.2
dia.
3
(Example: E2S-W and TL-W5 (sensing face on side) for other models (e.g. front facing models) please see
complete datasheet for details)
10
4
7.2 dia.
Models: E2EH
E2EH-X_-M1_
E2EH-X3_-M1_
E2EH-X12_-M1_
E2EH-X7_-M1_
4
M12 x 1
36
38
38
17
58
43
53
53
10
24
M12 x 1
4
10
5
10
M12 x 1
Indicator
Two clamping nuts
M18 x 1
Indicator
Two clamping nuts
M12 x 1
Indicator
Two clamping nuts
M30 x 1.5
Models: E2FM
E2FM-X_B1-M1
E2FM-X1R5B1-M1
E2FM-X2B1-M1
53.5
53
34.5
39
30
25
13
33
21 dia.
5
4
15 dia.
Two clamping nuts
M8 x 1
Toothed washer
7
4
M12 x 1
Four operation
indicators (yellow)
17
M12 x 1
Two clamping nuts
E2FM-X5B1-M1
E2FM-X10B1-M1
M12 x 1
Four operation
indicators (yellow)
Toothed washer
63.5
49
56
43
42
36
29 dia.
4
42 dia.
5
10
10
M12 x 1
24
M18 x 1
Two clamping
nuts
Toothed washer
Four operation
indicators (yellow)
M12 x 1
36
M30 x 1.5
Two clamping
nuts
Toothed washer
166
Four operation
indicators (yellow)
Product dimensions
Technical information
Photoelectric sensors
Models: E3Z, E3Z LASER, E3Z-_G, E3Z-_J, E3Z-_H, E3Z-B, E3ZM, E3ZM-C, E3ZM-B, E3ZM-V
Receiver
Optical axis
Two, 7-dia.
lenses
17
2.1
Operation indicator (orange)
4
18 4
31
25.4
10.8 10.4
10.4
Emitter
Stability indicator (green)
2-M3
9.75
2.1
Operation indicator (orange)
4
18 4
31
Operation
selector
Sensing adjuster
M8 connector
Sensing adjuster
17
Two, 7-dia.
lenses
25.4
20
12.45
8.8
4.3
3.2
15.5
Emitter
4.3
3.2
15.5
Receiver
Optical axis
20
12.45
8.8
10.8 10.4
2-M3
Vinyl-insulated round cable with three conductors, 4 dia.
(0.2 mm² with 1.1-dia. insulator); standard length: 2 m
Operation
selector
Stability indicator (green)
7.5
Receiver
Optical
axis
32.2
20.6
3.5
31 25.4
15.5
10.8
Emitter
0.7
Two,
M3
M8 x 1
Operation indicator (yellow)
Stability indicator (green)
21
(Example: E3Z-R and E3ZM-LS, please note that minor variations of the dimensions are possible for different models e.g. position of indicator, etc. - please see complete
datasheet for details)
Models: E3F2
optical
area
24
27.7
6.2
4 dia
4.8 dia
16.4 dia
64.9
49.3
42.3
37
Sensitivity adjustor
Light indicator
4
M18x1 6g
76
65.5
4
6.2
24
Sensitivity adjustor
Light indicator
M18x1 6g
11
(Example: E3F2-R4 metal housing, please note that minor
variations of the dimensions are possible for different models
e.g. position of indicator, etc. - please see complete datasheet
for details)
Technical information
optical
area
27.7
16.4 dia
37
4.8 dia
M12x1 6g
49.3
42.3
167
Product dimensions
Technical information
Models: E3FZ
E3FZ-T
Emitter
Receiver
Stability indicator (green)
Operation indicator (yellow)
Power indicator (green)
M18x1 6g
Optical Axis
M12x1 6g
M12x1 6g
16.25
16.25
15
9.30
E3FZ-R
E3FZ-LS
9.30
30.35
Prewired models
15
Emitter
Optical Axis
16.25
9.30
30.25
Prewired models
Connector models
Stability indicator (green)
Operation indicator (yellow)
Stability indicator (green)
Operation indicator (yellow)
M18x1 6g
16.25
15
16.25
9.30
30.25
Models: E3T
E3T-SR4_
7
Stability
indicator
11
Mounting Holes
9.2
1.75
2-M2
3.8
4.5
15
Lens
(2.0 dia.)
20.6
Two, 2.2 dia.
15±0.2
3.9
2.4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors
(Conductor cross section: 0.1 mm² (AWG27),
Insulator diameter: 0.7 mm), Standard length: 2 m
3.7
6.3
E3T-FL1_
E3T-FL2_
12
Operation
indicator
3.1
2.5
3
3
Optical axis
(Example: E3T-SR and E3T-FL, please note that minor
variations of the dimensions are possible for different
models e.g. position of indicator, etc. - please see
complete datasheet for details)
168
3.5
Stability indicator
Receiver lens
(2.8 square)
19
20.8
24
10.35
Emitter lens
(1.5 dia.)
Two, 2.2 dia.
4.4
8
M18x1 6g
M12x1 6g
22.55
5.20
Operation
Indicator
30.35
Sensitivity adjuster
4 dia
3.50
Sensitivity adjuster
Receiver
M18x1 6g
M12x1 6g
16.25
5.20
E3FZ-D
Operation indicator (yellow)
M18x1 6g
4 dia
Receiver
Stability indicator (green)
Operation indicator (yellow)
3.50
Optical Axis
30.35
Connector models
Stability indicator (green)
Emitter
M18x1 6g
1.75
30.35
Product dimensions
Technical information
Models: EE-SX
EE-SX970-C1
EE-SX970P-C1
Optical axis
13.4
5
6.8
2.6
0.8
26
20
2
Slit
13.8
2.1
3.2 7
9
3.7
3.7
10.8
2.2
3.9
22
7.4
3.2
Four, R1.6
20
Indicator window
Optical axis
EE-SX971-C1
EE-SX971P-C1
13.4
5
6.8
2.6
0.8
2
26.2
20
3.7
Slit
3.2 7
9
2.1
9
15.5
3.2
3.9
7.2
2
Four, R1.6
14
2.2
12.8
1
2 3 4
20
EE-SX972-C1
EE-SX972P-C1
Optical axis
6.8
13.4
5
0.8
2.6
2
4.1
9 10.8
3.7
Slit
1.6
12.6
26
13
22
3
6.2
7
13.7
Four, R1.6
20
Indicator window
EE-SX974-C1
EE-SX974P-C1
Optical axis
13.4
5
6.8
0.8
7
2.6
3.5
2
9
7
Two, 3.5 dia.
Slit
2
15.5
2.5
2
Indicator window
EE-SX975-C1
EE-SX975P-C1
1
2
3
4
12.8
Optical axis
6.8
13.4
5
0.8
2.6
2
10.8
Slit
2.5
9
3.7
Technical information
4.1
26
13
22
4
6
10
16.7
Four, R1.6
20
Indicator window
Optical axis
13.4
5
6.8
0.8
2.5
2.6
11
EE-SX976-C1
EE-SX976P-C1
3
2
10.8
3.7
9
Slit
22
Indicator window
169
Product dimensions
Technical information
Model: E3X-SD
15
10
Vinyl-insulated round cable
4 dia. cable / 3 conductors / Standard length: 2 m
(Conductor cross section: 0.2 mm2,
Insulator diameter: 1.1 mm)
Operation indicator
3
128.95
180°
93.75
Hole for optical communications
31.5
8
(9)
10.7
10.75
Two,
2.4 dia.
3.4
2.4
13
4
30.4
12.4
64.3
Models: E3X and E32
4.3
10
With Mounting Bracket Attached
70
Two, 2.4 dia.
Two, M3
32
9.9
4.5
5.65
16
Mounting Holes
E32-TC200
M2.6 x 0.45
Hole for optical
communications
Mounting Bracket (E39-L143)
SUS304 stainless steel
16
36.7
44.3
Two, 3.2 dia. holes
28.1
3
0.5 dia.
2.5
2.4
7
14
45
25
1.5
1
Two hexagonal nuts
Two toothed washers
Sensing head*
M6 x 0.75
4 dia.
2,000
35
*Material: brass/nickel plating
Sensing surface
Optical fibre: two, 2.2 dia.
*Material: stainless steel (SUS304)
E32-D11N
E32-DC200E
Two, 1 dia.
12
30
2,000
*Material: brass/nickel plating
E32-DC200
ptical fibre: 2.2 dia.
1.5
Fibre attachment (E39-F9)
11
5.5
Sensing head: 3 dia.
* Heat-shrinkable tube
2.8
10
1.8
2,000
16
E32-T14L | E32-T14LR
Two hexagonal nuts
Two toothed washers
Sensing head: M3 x 0.5*
Optical fibre: 1 dia.
3 dia.
3.2
4.4
3.4
28.1
18.7
Optical fibre: 2.2 dia.
The Mounting Bracket can
also be used on this side.
12.5
E32-TC200E
1 dia.
3.93=11.7
32.8
29.8
3.9
3
3.25
3.4
(Example: E3X-DA-S pre-wired, please note that minor
variations of the dimensions are possible for different models
e.g. adjuster, etc. - please see complete datasheet for details)
Two hexagonal nuts
Two toothed washers
Sensing head: M4 x 0.7*
15.1
12.15
Two hexagonal nuts
Two toothed washers
Sensing head: M3 x 0.5*
Optical fibre: two, 1 dia.
Two, 0.5 dia.
Two fibre attachments (E39-F9)
25
Two, 1-dia. (sensing surface)
10
2,000 (standard length)
Model display tube
Optical fiber, 2.2 dia.
(45)
2,000
1
11
*Material: stainless steel (SUS304)
1.5
*Material: ADC
12 dia.
E32-D15X 2M
E32-D14L | E32-D14LR
Sensing head*
45°
1
10
30
Sixteen 0.25 dia.
reception Emission fibre:
fibres
1 dia.
2.5 dia.
2.5
2.5
Two hexagonal nuts
Two toothed washers
Sensing head: M6 x 0.75*
Light baffle
Sensing surface: two, 1 dia.
*Material: aluminium
Sensing head*
5.2
10
3
2.4
23
2,000
*Material: brass/nickel plating
*Material: stainless steel (SUS304)
E32-EC41
E32-ET16WR-1
E32-D12F
White markings:
Fibre
Two toothed Two hexagonal
Brancher
Optical fibre: emission side
attachment
1 x 0.175 dia. washers
nuts
(ABS resin): two, 1.2 dia. (heat-shrinkable tube)
(emission fibre)
Irraxtube: 2.6 dia.3.5 dia.
(5)
40
Sensing head: 6 dia.
Optical fibre: two, 2.2 dia.
5 dia.
R20
4.5 dia.
8.6 dia.
countersinking
25
2,000
100
*Material: stainless steel (SUS303)
E32-T15Y 2M
7.5
2,000
2.5
100
2000
15
Two, 3.2 dia. mounting holes
with 6 dia. countersinks
5
Two, 2.2 dia. mounting
holes with 4.4 dia.
countersinks on both sides
81,5
E32-T16W | E32-T16WR
69
65
45
9
7
optical axis
16
10
(100)
1,000
Fluororesin
70 sensing area
15
1.8
17
22
12
Optical fibre:
two, 2.2 dia.
8
6
23
Optical fibre:
2.2 dia.
Sensing head
material: ABS
Sensing surface (3 x 30)
5
170
1.5
4
3
Sensing surface
Optical axis
Sensing head
Material: aluminium
7.5 dia
cylinder countersinking
4.5
2000
18
18.5
Optical fibre: two 2.2 dia.
2,000
Sensing surface
Sensing head:
M3 x 0.5*
Optical fibre: two, 2.2 dia.
12
35
6 x 0.175 dia.
(reception fibres)
7.5 5
125
6 dia.
2,000
15
Two, 2.2 dia. mounting holes
with 4.4 dia. countersinks on
both sides
3
1.5
2
Two, M6 nuts and
washers provided.
E32-CC200 | E32-CC200R
Heat-shrinkable tube Optical fibre: two, 2.2 dia.
5.7
10
2,000
8
5.5
11
2.4
17
Sensing head (brass/nickel plating) M6 × 0.75
10
3
4.8
10
1.8
4.7
2.5
9.5
2.2 dia. optical fibre
Product dimensions
Technical information
Limit switches
Models: D4N
D4N-1_20
47±1
40±1
17.5 dia. ´ 6.8
resin roller
(27)
11±0.2
26R
Resin lever
20.5 ´ 20.5
27.5
18
9±0.2
21.5
2.5
55
20±0.1
22±0.1
47±0.2
2.15±0.05R
mounting holes
22±0.2
31 max.
Conduit cap
Two, 4+0.15
0 dia. holes
Depth: 5
14.2
30
Models: D4B
D4B-_116N
71±1
64.4
53
46.8
28.3 16
19 dia. x 7
resin roller
Four, M3.5 x 24.5 head
clamping screws
25 to 89R
M5 x 16
Allen-head
bolts
Two, 5.3-dia.
mounting holes
Two, M4 x 12
cover clamping
screws
23
60±0.2
22.5
99.5
74
77
Cover
7.3
8
15
5.3
30±0.2
Conduit
31.5
43
40+10
Models: D4CC
D4CC-_002
12 dia. x 5 stainless steel roller
40 max.
25±0.1
PT
Two, 5.1+0.20 dia.
holes
(counter-sunk
10.2 dia.; depth: 6)
16
Correct
setting
position
2.8
OP
75 max.
59.5 max.
2
23
(2)
Indicator
2
1.4
1.5
34
M12 x 1
11
10.5
Technical information
7
7.5
8
171
Product dimensions
Technical information
Models: Z
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GM-B
18.65
20.2
4.9
56R
FP
17.4
13.9
OP
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
11.9
49.2
ZC-Q2155
Set position
PT indication line
A
53.4
23.3
11 dia.  4.7 *1
14
(3.6)
Two M14  1
hexagon nuts *3
OP
12.5
(2.25)
*2
21
19
5
(10)
22 max. 18.3
25.40.15
Terminal protective cover
55
*1. Stainless sintered alloy roller
*2. The length of the imperfect threads is 1.5 mm maximum.
*3. Thickness: 3 width: 17
172
15
Two, 4.30.1 dia.
mounting holes
(21  21)
21.7
Seal rubber
(NBR)
173
174
175
Index
A
EE
Accessories fiber optic sensors . . . . . . . . . 109
Accessories photoelectric sensors . . . . . . . . 60
EE-SPX_03
EE-SX77 .
EE-SX87 .
EE-SX97 .
C
Cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
D
F3E . .
F3EM .
F3ET .
FQ-CLR
E2
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 113
. 115
. 117
. 116
. 125
. 129
. 118
. 126
. 119
. 123
. 127
. 124
. 122
. 121
E3
E32 Fibers
Enhanced environmental resistance . . . . 89–92
General application . . . . . . . . . . . . 82–88
Special objects or installation . . . . . . . 94–97
E39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
E3C-LDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
E3F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
E3F2-_41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
E3F2-_-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
E3FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
E3FZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
E3FZ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
E3G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
E3G-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
E3H2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
E3JK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
E3JM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
E3S-CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
E3S-LS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
E3T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
E3T-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
E3X-DACLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E3X-DAC-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E3X-DAH-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
E3X-DA-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
E3X-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
E3X-MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
E3X-NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
E3X-NA_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
E3X-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
E3Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
E3Z-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
E3Z-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
E3Z-Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
E3ZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
E3ZM-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
E3ZM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
E3ZM-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
E6
E6A2-C
E6B2-C
E6C2-C
E6C3-A
E6C3-C
E6C-N .
E6F-A .
E6F-C .
E6H-C .
176
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 146
. 146
. 147
. 149
. 147
. 148
. 149
. 147
. 148
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 57
. 59
. 59
. 58
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 76
. 78
. 75
. 71
F
D4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
D4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
D4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
E2A . . . . . . . . . . .
E2A DC 2-wire/DC 4-wire
E2A3 . . . . . . . . . . .
E2A-S . . . . . . . . . .
E2AU . . . . . . . . . . .
E2C-EDA . . . . . . . . .
E2E Small Diameter . . .
E2E-_-U . . . . . . . . .
E2EC . . . . . . . . . . .
E2EH . . . . . . . . . . .
E2FM . . . . . . . . . .
E2FQ . . . . . . . . . . .
E2Q5 . . . . . . . . . . .
E2S . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TL-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
TZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
W
WL-_T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
X
XS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
XS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
XS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Y
Y92E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Z
Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Refer to the other guides and the DVD
Your guides to machine safety and
vision, ident & measurement solutions
Your technical library for complete dimension drawings,
technical specifications and performance charts
Note:
Although we do strive for perfection, Omron Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies do not warrant or make any representations regarding the correctness or
completeness of information described in this catalogue. Product information in this catalogue is provided ‚as is‘ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. In a jurisdiction where the exclusion of implied
warranties is not valid, the exclusion shall be deemed to be replaced by such valid exclusion, which most closely matches the intent and purpose of the original exclusion. Omron
Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies reserve the right to make any changes to the products, their specifications, data at its sole discretion at any time without
prior notice. The material contained in this catalogue may be out of date and Omron Europe BV and/or its subsidiary and affiliated companies make no commitment to update
such material.
OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 13 00 Fax: +31 (0) 23 568 13 88 industrial.omron.eu
Austria
Tel: +43 (0) 2236 377 800
industrial.omron.at
France
Tel: +33 (0) 1 56 63 70 00
industrial.omron.fr
Norway
Tel: +47 (0) 22 65 75 00
industrial.omron.no
Spain
Tel: +34 913 777 900
industrial.omron.es
Belgium
Tel: +32 (0) 2 466 24 80
industrial.omron.be
Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 2173 680 00
industrial.omron.de
Poland
Tel: +48 22 645 78 60
industrial.omron.pl
Sweden
Tel: +46 (0) 8 632 35 00
industrial.omron.se
Czech Republic
Tel: +420 234 602 602
industrial.omron.cz
Hungary
Tel: +36 1 399 30 50
industrial.omron.hu
Portugal
Tel: +351 21 942 94 00
industrial.omron.pt
Switzerland
Tel: +41 (0) 41 748 13 13
industrial.omron.ch
Denmark
Tel: +45 43 44 00 11
industrial.omron.dk
Italy
Tel: +39 02 326 81
industrial.omron.it
Russia
Tel: +7 495 648 94 50
industrial.omron.ru
Turkey
Tel: +90 216 474 00 40
industrial.omron.com.tr
Finland
Tel: +358 (0) 207 464 200
industrial.omron.fi
Netherlands
Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 11 00
industrial.omron.nl
South Africa
Tel: +27 (0) 11 579 2600
industrial.omron.co.za
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 870 752 08 61
industrial.omron.co.uk
More Omron representatives industrial.omron.eu
Authorised Distributor:
ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Control Systems
• Programmable logic controllers • Human-machine interfaces • Remote I/O
Motion & Drives
• Motion controllers • Servo systems • Inverters
Control Components
• Temperature controllers • Power supplies • Timers • Counters • Programmable relays
• Digital panel indicators • Electromechanical relays • Monitoring products • Solid-state relays
• Pushbutton switches • Low voltage switch gear
Sensing & Safety
• Photoelectric sensors • Inductive sensors • Limit switches • Rotary encoder • Cable connectors
• Displacement & width-measuring sensors • Vision systems • Safety networks • Safety sensors
• Safety units/relay units • Safety door/guard lock switches
Cat.No. Y206-EN2-04+IndustSensing-Guide2012
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement